MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 11 Marketing Management

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 11 Marketing Management

Marketing Management Important Questions

Marketing Management Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What do you mean by marketing research ?
Answer:
Marketing research is a systematic and intensive investigation of all phases of marketing on a continuous basis with a view to have better understanding and knowledge about the present and future marketing problems.

Question 2.
What do you mean by sales promotion ?
Answer:
Sales promotion refers to all those activities which are undertaken to increase sales. These activities are besides advertising, publicity and personal selling. Sales promotion motivates both consumers and middlemen. Some common sales promotion measures are coupons, premium, bonus, offers, contests etc.

Question 3.
What do you mean by external advertisement ?
Answer:
It is very economical and flexible. It quickly attracts all types of customers. Some examples of external advertisement are as follows: poster, advertisement board, hoarding, advertisement in newspaper and advertisement by loudspeaker, etc. It needs the place which is full by large number of peoples.

Question 4.
What do you mean by ‘product mix’ ?
Answer:
Product mix involves the activities relating to the product, service or idea to be offered. The different products which are offered / produced by an origination, enterprise or a producer, the list of products is called as a product mix.

Question 5.
What are the advantages of advertisement in newspapers ?
Answer:
Following are the advantages of advertisement in newspaper:

  1. These are comparatively cheaper.
  2. These leaves a long time effect on the consumers.
  3. These are more effective.
  4. These are reliable.

Question 6.
Write two functions of packaging.
Answer:

(a) Safety -: By packaging goods are protected from dust, air, moisture, water, etc.
(b) Increase in sale : The function of packaging is to increase in sale because goods are sold in good conditions by packaging.

Question 7.
Write the names of the media of advertisement.
Answer:
The names of the media of advertisement are as follows :

  1. Radio
  2. Television
  3. Newspaper
  4. Poster, leaflets and pamphlets
  5. Direct mail advertising
  6. Window display.

Question 8.
Make a list of characteristics of a good brand name.
Answer:
Following are the characteristics of a good brand name :

  1. Brand should be small and general: It should be small and easy to pronounced For example : Tata, Dalda etc.
  2. Attractive : Brand should always be attractive so that product will be attracted. For example Uncle chips, ManMohini.

Question 9.
List the characteristics of convenience products.
Answer:
Following are characteristics of convenience products :

  1. These goods are purchased at convenient location with least efforts and time.
  2. They hate regular and continuous demand.
  3. They are purchased in small quantities and per unit price is low.
  4. They are mostly branded and have standardized price.
  5. The competition is high as the supply is greater than the demand.
  6. Sales promotion schemes play an important role in the marketing of such prod

Question 10.
What do you mean by Market ?
Answer:
By market we don’t mean any place but it is related to transaction of goods between seller and buyers.

Question 11.
What do you mean by pricing ?
Answer:
The term price denotes the money value of product. It is the amount the money for which a product can be exchanged. He pays price his services done.

Question 12.
What do you mean by Trade Mark ?
Answer:
Any brand or branded product when gets legal protection and is registered it is called‘Trade mark’.
Brand is an English word but in Hindi conversation also brand is mostly used. Brand refers to a special word, symbol, letter or mixture of all these. Branding is used for product differentiation, building distinct image of the product and to popularize the product and its producers.

According to American Marketing Association, “A brand is a name, term, sign, symbol or design or a combination of term which intended to identify the goods or services of one seller or group of sellers and to differentiate them from those of competitors.” Thus brand is a type of design or identity.

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
What is marketing ?
Answer:
Marketing is such commercial process by which goods are produced according to the need of consumers (Markets). Marketing includes production, research transportation packing, advertisement, purchase and sale, etc.

Question 14.
What is publicity ?
Answer:
Publicity is a type of non-personal communication in which message goes in the form of news from person to person.

Question 15.
Who is customer ?
Answer:
By customer we mean those people or organisations who satisfy their needs and wants. .

Question 16. What do you mean by sales promotion ?
Answer:
It refers to all activities which are undertaken to increase sales. Some common sales promotion measures are coupons, premium, bonus offers, etc.

Question 17.
When is demand considered elastic ?
Answer:
Demand is considered to be elastic when demand changes highly with a slight change in price of product numerically price elating is more than unit 1.

Question 18.
What do you mean by product planning ?
Answer:
Product planning implies all activities which enable a firm to determine what should constitute as line product.

Question 19.
What do you mean by packaging ?
Answer:
Packaging means covering, wrapping, crafting, filling or compressing of products to protect from spoilage, breakage, leakage etc. Packaging refers to designing and producing suitable packages for goods. It involves determination of convenient size lots in which the goods are to put for marketing.

Question 20.
What do you mean by grading ?
Answer:
When products are divided into various groups according to their quality, size and other characteristics. Grading ensures that products are of specific quality.

Marketing Management Short Answer Type Questions

What is marketing ? What functions does it play with process of exchange of of sand services ? Explain.
Answer:
1. Transportation : Transportation involves physical movement of goods from one place to another. A marketer has to perform this function very efficiently keeping in mind the nature of product, cost, location of target market, etc.

2. Storage  housing : In order to maintain smooth flow of products in the market, there is nee d for proper storage of the products. Further, there is a need for storage of adequate stock o f goods to protect against unavoidable delays in delivery or to meet out contingencies in the; marinade. Wholesalers and retailers are playing an important role.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Distinguish be tween the product concept and production concept of marketing.
Answer:
Differences bet ween Product Concept and Production Concept:
Product concept

  1. The focus of the product concept is on quality of the product
  2. This concept works on the assumption the it customer  products of greater quality and price and availability does not influnte their purchase decision.
  3. Company devotes most of its time in developing a product, a grater quality and expensive goods

Production concept

  1. The focus here is on quantity of the product.
  2. This concept works on the assumption that consumers prefer a product which is in expensive and widely available.
  3. Companies focus on producing more of the product and making sure that it is easily available to the consumer very easily.

Question 3.
Product is a bundle of utilities. Do you agree ? Comment.
Answer:
Yes, product is a bundle of utilities, which is purchased because of its capability
to provide satisfaction of certain need. A buyer buys a product or service for what it does or service for what it does for her or the ,benefits it provides. There can be three types of benefits, it provides to a customer.

  1. Functional benefits.
  2. Psychological benefits.
  3. Social benefits.

e.g., the purchase of a motorcycle provides functional utility of transportation, but at the same time satisfies the need for prestige and esteem and provides social benefit by the
way of acceptance from a group riding it.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What are industrial products ? How are they different from consumer products ? Explain.
Answer:
Industrial products are those products which are used as inputs in providing other products e.g., raw material, engines, tools, lubricants, etc.
The differences between consumer products and industrial products is based on their

Consumer Product:

  1. Consumer is the buyer.
  2. It is a purchased for personal consumption.
  3. Number of buyers of consumer products is large.
  4. The market of consumer product is broad.
  5. The number of consumer product is high.

Industrial Product

  1. Industries units and the processors are the buyers.
  2. It is bough and used for making other products.
  3. Number of Myers is limited in case of industrial products.
  4. The market of industrial product is narrow.
  5. The number of Industrial product is less.

Question 5.
Write the functions of marketing.
Answer:
Following functions face under marketing :

1.The first function is buying and assembling of goods. Here assembling refers to the collection of goods and accumulation at convenient or centralization in order to facilitate distribution

2.After buying and assembling of goods, they upgraded and brought up under the condition of sale

3.Standardization and grading of; goods on the basis of quality, size, brands, etc.

4.Proper packing for safe transportation and storing them (Goods) before transportation in warehouses,

5.To improve the sales techniques and undertake sales promotion work like sample distribution demonstration, gift plans, etc.

6.After sale of goods, their dispatch (i.e., transportation) and proper handover of good is also fall under the preview of marketing

7.Marketing research, study of taste of consumers and pricing of goods.

Question 6.
Enlist the advantages of packaging of a consumer products.
Answer:
Important of packaging:

  1. Helps in raising’ the standard of health and sanitation.
  2. Helps in self service outlets as consumer own what to buy, can easily decide on his.
  3. Innovation opportunity e.g., new types of package availability have made it easier to market the product,
  4. Product differentiation packaging is one of the very important means creating product differentiation.

Question 7.
Products is a mixture of tangible and inf tangible attributes. Discuss.
Answer:
In marketing, product is a mixture of Tangier and intangible attributes which are capable of being exchanged for a value, with ability to , satisfy customer need’s. Beside physical objects, include services, ideas, persons and pi ace in the concepts of product. Thus, product may be defined as anything that can be offer ed i n a market to satisfy a want or need. It is offered for attention, acquisition, use or consumption.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Describe the functions of labeling b a the marketing of products.
Answer:
Label on a product provides detailed information about the product, its contents, methods of use etc. the various functions perform med by a label are as follows :

(i) Describe the product and specify its contents one of the most important functions
of labels in that it describe the product, its us age, cautions in the use, etc. and specify its contents.

(ii) Identification of the product or Br and a label helps in identifying the product or brand e.g., we can easily pick our favorite soap from a lumber of packages only because of its label.

(iii) Grading of products labels help grading the products into different categories. Sometimes, marketers assign different grades to indicate features or quality of the product e.g., different type of tea is sold by some brands under “Fellow, Red and Green label categories.

(iv) Help in promotion of products an important function of label is to aid in promotion of the products. A carefully designed label can a the customer to purchase. So, many labels provide promotional me usages, some shove discount or other schemes etc.

(v) Providing information required by law: Another important function of labelling is to provide information required by , law e.g., the statutory warning on the package of cigarette or pan masala Smoking is injuring to health’ or ‘Chewing tobacco causes cancer.

Question 9.
Discuss the role of intermediaries in the distribution of consumer non durable products.
Answer:
The term channels distribution refers the facilitate to the movement of goods and services and their title bet ween the point of production and point of consumption, by forming a variety of marketing activities. Following are the functions performed by the channels of distribution.

(i) Accumulation : If aims at holding the stock to match between the consumer demand and supply condition warehousing helps in maintaining continuous flow of goods and services.

(ii) Promotion : The marketing channels also help in promoting the demand for the product by displaying demonstrating and participating in various promotional activities organized by the producers.

(iii) Negotiating: The marketing channels are the intermediaries between the producers and the consumers. They attempt to reach final’agreement on price and other terms of the offer, so that transfer of ownership is properly affected.

(iv) Risk taking : Risk taking is the basic responsibility of the intermediaries. It may arise out of physical deterioration, changes in price levels, natural calamities, change in fashion etc. These are unavoidable as they hold sufficiently large and variety of inventories till the sale of stock.

(v) Grading/Sorting : Grading is the process whereby they sort the products on the basis of different sizes, qualities, moisture contents and so on. It helps us realizing the time value for the product and at the same time ultimate consumer feels satisfied with the uniform quality of the product.

(vi) Packaging : The products are packed in the small gradable lots for the convenience of the consumer.

(vii) Assembling/Assortment: Marketing channels aim at satisfying the needs of the customers. The products desired by the consumer may not be a available in the market. They procure such goods from different sources, assemble or assort them as per the requirements of the consumers

MP Board Solutions

Question 10.
Explain the factors determining choice of channels of distribution.
Answer:
The choice of channels depend on various factors, which are discussed as follows : .

(i) Product related Factors : The important product related considerations is deciding the channels. It includes whether the product is an industrial product or a consumer product. Industrial product require shorter channel and consumer products require longer channel.

(ii) Company characteristics : The important company characteristics affecting the choice of channels of distribution include the financial strength of the company and the degree of control, it wants to hold on other channel member. Direct selling involves lot of foods to be invested in fixed assets say starting own retail outlets or engaging large number at sales, force.

Similarly if the management want to have greater control on the channel number, short channels are used but if the management do not want more control over the middlemen, it can go in for longer channel or large number of intermediaries.

(iii) Competitive factors : The choice of channel is also affected by what the competitor has selected as its channel. Sometimes.

(iv) Market factors : Important market factors affecting the choice of channel of distribution include size of market, geographical concentration of potential buyers and quantity purchased.

(v) Environmental factors : Sometimes environmental factors also helps in deciding the channel of distribution e.g., in a depressed economy, marketers use shorter channels to distribute their goods in an economical way.

Question 11.
Explain briefly the components of physical distribution.
Answer:
The main components of physical distribution are as follows :

(i) Order processing : If a firm takes more time to process the order, then the consumer remains dissatisfied. Therefore, order processing has to made faster by using information technology.

(ii) Inventory control : Inventories ensure availability of the product as and when consumer demand arises. There are various factors which influence a firm decision regarding the level of inventory e.g., degree of accuracy of sales forecast, cost of blocking of the working capital, etc.

(iii) Warehousing: It refers to the storage of goods from the time of production to the time of consumption, warehousing is important as it creates time utility.

(iv) Transportation : It creates place utility, it refers to the carrying of raw materials or finished goods from one place to another. The most important thing to be kept in mind is that the value addition by transportation should be greater than the cost of transportation.

Question 12.
Define advertising, what are its main features ? Explain.
Answer:
Advertising is defined as the impersonal form of communication which is paid form by the marketer to promote some goods or services. It is commonly use as the promotional tool of the company, the important features of advertising are as follows :

(i) Paid from advertising : is a paid from the communication which means the sponsor has to bear the cost to communication with the prospects.

(ii) Impersonal : There is no direct face to contact between the prospect and advertiser. It is therefore, referred as the impersonal method of promotion.

(iii) Identified sponsor advertising is undertaken by some identified individual or company, who makes the advertising efforts and also bears the cost of it.

Question 13.
Discuss the role of ‘Sales Promotion’ as an elements of promotion mix.
Answer:
Sales promotion includes those marketing activities other than personal selling, advertising and publicity that stimulate consumer purchasing and dealer effectiveness, such as display, shows and exhibitions, demonstrations and various non-current selling efforts not in the ordinary routine, the main objectives of sales promotion activities are :

  1. Creation of demand for the product
  2. Educating the consumers about new products or new uses of the old product
  3. Building the brand loyalty for the product among the consumers.

Question 14.
What do you mean by sales promotion ? Write any four objectives.
Answer:
Meaning : Sales promotion refers to all those activities which are undertaken to increase sales. These activities are besides advertising, publicity and personal selling. Sales promotion motivates both consumers and middlemen. Some common sales promotion measures are coupons, premium, bonus, offers, contests, etc.
Objectives of Sales Promotion : The objectives of sales promotion are as follows :

  1. To provide information to new consumers about products and services and motivating them to purchase those products.
  2. To popularize the products among common people.
  3. 3. To make existing customers as permanent customers.
  4. To motivate intermediaries and traders to buy more goods.
  5. To increase sales in festive occasions like – Holi, Diwali, etc.
  6. To face the cut throat competition effectively.
  7. To provide detailed knowledge about the product to customers.
  8. To regain the old consumers and to increase the sale in slack period.
  9. To start the sales of products in a new market.
  10. To increase goodwill as well as profits.

Question 15.
Write the characteristics of a good packaging.
Answer:
The characteristics of packaging are :

  1. Packaging is a science as well as an art.
  2. Packaging is related with product planning.
  3. The aim of packaging is to protect the product and make it convenient for the customers to use the product.
  4. La belling and Branding activities are included in packaging.
  5. There are differences between packing and packaging.

Question 16.
What are the essentials of a good brand ?
Or
What points should be kept in mind while selecting a good brand ?
Answer:
The essentials of a good brand are :

  1. Brand should be easily pronounceable
  2. It should be suggestive
  3. It should be distinctive
  4. It should be meaningful
  5. It should be simple and short
  6. It should be memorable
  7. Brand should be attractive
  8. It should be register able
  9. It should be economic.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
Discuss the following functions of marketing briefly :

  1. Marketing mix
  2. Branding
  3. Packaging.

Answer:

(a) Marketing mix: “The policies adopted by manufacturing concerns to attain success in the market contribute the market mix”. —R.S. Davar
For achieving the objectives of business a marketing plan is prepared in which decisions regarding product price, channel of distribution, techniques of sales promotion, etc.are taken. The combination of these elements is called marketing mix.

(b) Branding : Branding refers to the process of assigning specific name of the product by which-it is to be known and remembered. A brand represents a word, symbol or a letter or a combination of all of them. A brand is the buyer’s expectation and seller’s promise to satisfy them consistently.

(c) Packaging : Packaging means covering, wrapping, crafting, filling or compressing of products to protect from spoilage, breakage, leakage, etc. Packaging refers to designing and producing suitable packages for goods. It involves determination of convenient size lots

Question 18.
Discuss the following function of marketing :

  1. Labelling
  2. Sales promotion
  3. Advertisement.

Answer:
1. Labelling : Labelling refers to putting strip of paper or informative tag or metal in the package or the product. Label is the carrier of information which is attached to product package. It denotes the nature of product contents weight, ownership, destination, date of manufacture and necessary information for the users or consumers.

2. Sales promotion : Includes those activities stimulate market demand for product through short term incentives which are of non-recurring nature and temporary. These technique of sales promotion serve as bridge between the production of its consumer.

3. Advertisement: Advertising aims to committing the producer, educating the consumer supplementing the salesman, connecting the dealer to eliminate the competitor but above all its a link between producer and consumer. Advertising is the most widely used method of sales promotion.

Question 19.
Distinguish between Branding and Trade mark.
Answer:
Differences between Branding and Trade mark :

Branding

  1. In it registration of name, symbol or design is not done.
  2. All types of brand do not possess trademark.
  3. Brand can be used by more than one manufacturer or seller.
  4. Scope of branding is limited.

Trade mark

  1. In it registration of name, symbol or design is done.
  2. All trade marks have branding.
  3. Trade mark can be used by only one manufacturer or seller.
  4. Scope of trade mark is large and unlimited.

MP Board Solutions

Question 20.
Write the characteristics of Advertising.
Answer:
The following characteristics of Advertising are :

1.Economic growth: It acts as a barometer of a nations economic growth advertising promotion healthy competition and provides better quality goods at cheaper rates to the society.

2.Source of income : It provides a regular source of income to newspapers. It has been estimated that nearly 80% of the income to newspapers and magazines is secured through advertisements.

3.Standard of living : It uplifts the living standard of the people advertising acts an effective tool in raising standards of living.

4.Employment : It is generates employment opportunities directly it provides to many people who work as artists, painters, writers and experts in the field of advertising.

Question 21.
Write the differences between Advertisement and Sales promotion
Answer:
Differences between Advertisement and Sales promotion :
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 11 Marketing Management image - 1
Question 22.
What is the marketing concept ? How does it help in the effective marketing of goods and services ?
Answer:
Orientation of marketing implies that focus on the satisfaction of customers need, is the key to the success of any organisation in the market. All the decisions in the firm are taken from the point of view of the customers e.g., what product will be produced, with what features and at what price shall it be sold or where shall it be made available for sale will depend on what do the customer wants.
Marketing concept helps in effective marketing of goods and services by using the following:

  1. Identification of market or customer who are chosen e.s., the target of marketing effort,
  2. Understanding needs and wants of customers in the target market
  3. Development of products or services for satisfying needs of the target market
  4. Satisfying needs of target market better than the competitors
  5. Doing all this at a profit.

Question 23.
What are the essential conditions of exchange mechanism ?
Answer:
Following are the conditions of exchange mechanism :

  1. There should be two parties :
  2. Customer and producers.
  3. Both the parties should have capacity to satisfy each other.
  4. Both the parties should have capacity to communicate each other.
  5. Out of these both the parties have full freedom of accepting each other
  6. Any one can become the member of exchange process.

Question 24.
What is the differences between trade mark and brand ?
Answer:
Difference between Trade mark and Brand :

  1. Registration : Registration of brand is not necessary while trade mark should be registered.
  2. Statutory : Since brands are not registered that’s why they are not statutory while trade marks are statutory.
  3. Use : Brand can be used by the competitors or rival groups but trade mark cannot be used by the competitors or rival enterprises.
  4. Scope : Scope of brand is limited while scope of trade mark is wider.
  5. All brands are not mark : All brands are not trade marks but all trade marks are brands
  6. Legal action : If the competitors copy the brand then no legal action can be taken but if competitors copy trade mark then legal action can be taken against them.

Question 25.
What are techniques or methods of sales promotion ?
Answer:

1. Samples : The best method of sales promotion is the free distribution of products. This sample is used by the consumers and if the consumer is satisfied than he gets attracted towards the product itself. Sales representatives distribute these samples door to door. This method is very useful in introduction of new product. This type of method is mostly used in case of products of daily use e.g.. Tooth paste, soaps, medicines etc.

2. Coupons : Some companies for sales promotion uses coupons. Coupon is a certificate written on paper in which some discount or services or gift is mentioned for the purchaser, e.g., for purchasing a pack of tea a discount of Rs. 5 is offered. If the cost of tea pack is Rs. 50 then customer will have to pay Rs. 45. Coupon method easily attracts the consumers.

3. Premium : A premium offer is the offer of an article at no cost or at a very nominal price on the purchase of a specified product e.g., on purchase of T.V. one watch free or a tape record at half of actual price.

4. Contests: It is an effective method of sales promotion with a view to popularity the products the producers organised various contests. In these type of contests the consumers participates and wins prizes and various services from companies. Contests are conducted for consumers as well as traders.

Example.

  1. To write and send a slogan for the concerned product
  2. Write a suitable name for the product
  3. Complete the sentence contest like, I use Lifebuoy soap because
  4. To solve the puzzles
  5. To explain the advantages and various uses of products
  6. Lucky draw contest.

5. Demonstrations : It involves activities which enables the consumers to know how to make operational use of products. The objective of demonstration is to provide an opportunity to the consumers to learn how to use the product and to explain the usefulness of the product.

6. Fairs and Exhibitions : Fairs and exhibitions are having an important place in increasing the sales. These are held at local, national and international level. In this method, seller displays their product attractively and consumers are attracted towards these products. Book sellers organised fairs called Book Fairs

MP Board Solutions

Question 26.
Explain the various strategies which are used in branding.
Answer:

  1. Brand: For each product firm uses different types of brand. Brand is a specific type of identity.
  2. Brand name : The products are known by their brand name. It consists of a name, term or symbol.
  3. Brand mark : Each product is given brand mark along with the name.
  4. Trade mark : Registration of trade mark is compulsory.

Marketing Management Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are the concepts of marketing management philosophies.
Answer:
1. Production concept : It works on an assumptions that consumers prefer a product which is expensive and widely available. Increase in the production of the product makes the companies get advantage of economies of scale. This decreased production cost makes the product inexpensive and more attractive to the customer. Low price may attract new customers, but focus is just on production and not on the product quality.

This may result in decrease in sales if the product is not up to the standards. This philosophy only works when the demand is more than the supply. Moreover, a customer not always prefers an inexpensive product over others. There are many other factors which influence his purchase decision.

2. Product concept : This concept works on an assumption that customers prefer products of ‘greater quality’ and ‘price and availability’ doesn’t influence their purchase decision. Hence company devotes most of its time in developing a product of greater quality which usually turns out to be expensive. Since the main focus of the marketers is the product quality, they often  or fail to appeal to customers whose demands are driven by other factors like price, availability, usability, etc.

3. Selling concept : Production and product concept both focus on production but selling concept focuses on making an actual sale of the product. Selling concept focuses on making every possible sale of the product, regardless of the quality of the product or the need of the customer.

The main focus is to make money. This philosophy doesn’t include building relations with the customers. Hence repeated sales are very less. Companies following this concept may even try to deceive the customers to make them buy their product. Companies which follow this philosophy have a short sighted approach as they ‘try to sell what they make rather than what market wants’.

4. Marketing concept: Selling concept cannot let a company last long in the market. It’s a consumers market after all. To succeed in the 23th century, one has to produce a product to fulfill the needs of their customers. Hence, emerged the marketing concept. This concept works on an assumption that consumers buy products which fulfill their needs. Businesses following the marketing concept conduct researches to know about customers’ needs and wants and come out with products to fulfill the same better than the competitors.

By doing so, the business makes a relation with the customer and generate profits in the long run. However this isn’t the only philosophy which should be followed. Many business still follow other concepts and make profits. It totally depends on the demand and supply and the needs of the parties involved.

5. Social marketing concept ; Adding to the marketing concept, this philosophy focuses on society’s well-being as well. Business focus on how to fulfill the needs of the customer without effecting the environment, natural resources and focusing on society’s well being.

This philosophy believes that the business is a part of the society and hence should take part in social services like elimination of poverty, illiteracy, and controlling explosive population growth etc. Many of the big companies have included corporate social responsibility as a part of their marketing activities.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What are the functions of marketing research ?
Answer:
1. Marketing Research : Under marketing research, data and/or information regarding the number of consumers and their purchasing power, their wants and fashion, habit, need etc. are collected so that goods could be produced according to wants and need of consumers.

2. Product Planning and Development: Goods produced in accordance with wants and fashion of consumers is called product planning and to effect changes in the products from time to time like size, color and quality comes under development. Both these activities are covered under marketing.

3. Standardization and Grading: There are many types of consumers. Standardization and grading of goods produced are done according to the need and purchasing power of consumers. This one of the function of marketing.

4. Packaging : According to the modem concept, a product is easily marketed and sold if packaging is of high standard. The consumer also wants every product well packed. Therefore, packaging is very important in marketing.

5. Storage : Storage is necessary for raw material and to maintain supply of goods according to demand as also to store raw material. Huge storage’s or warehouses are built for raw material.

6. Purchase Sale: Purchase and sale are two most important activities under marketing. It is for these activities that the other activities of marketing are undertaken.

7. Transportation : Due to the increase in distances between producer and the consumer, work of transportation has assumed greater importance. Sale and purchase of goods is impossible without transportation. Therefore, transportation is an important function of marketing.

8. Risk and Insurance : Marketing is full of risks. Sometimes, losses are incurred in marketing. To prevent losses in marketing, insurance is taken.

9. Advertisement: in the modem age of development, it is difficult to sell any product without advertising. Therefore, advertising is necessary to maintain the sales drive. It is an important function of marketing.

10. Pricing : Price is related to cost of production and profit. In the modem age of competition. Pricing is now being compared to price of other similar products and therefore pricing is a difficult job which is covered under marketing.

Question 3.
Difference between sales promotion and personal selling.
Answer:
Differences between Sales Promotion and Personal Selling
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 11 Marketing Management image - 2
MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What do you mean by personal selling ? What are its characteristics ?
Answer:
Meaning: During the course of advertising the producer tells all about his product but cannot know the immediate reaction of customers. To make up this deficiency the producers adopted personal selling. It is a two tier system which establishes close relationship between salesman and buyers resulting in mutual satisfaction. Characteristics of Personal Selling:

1. Direct Sales : In personal selling the seller directly sells the product to consumers. There is face to face contact between seller and purchaser.

2. Personal Relation : Through personal selling a personal contact establishes between purchaser and seller. There is no chain between purchaser and seller. Personal selling is a mind to mind approach.

3. Knowledge of Product: In it seller is having complete knowledge about product. Thus, seller explains the uses and merits of product to consumers.

4. Two way communication : It is totally a two way communication. The purchaser and seller are free to give their opinions.

5. Oral conversation : There is oral conversations between the seller and buyer regarding characteristics of the product.

6. Part of Marketing Programmer : Marketing is a wide concept. Personal selling is a part of marketing.

7. Universal : Personal selling is a universal process. It can be utilized in different areas of life. In society whether he is leader or advocate, producer or labour, teacher or student, doctor or patient all of these can express their opinions to achieve their objectives.

8. Others : Apart from the above characteristics, other characteristics are as follows :

  1. Creative art
  2. Social character
  3. Long term relation
  4. Persuasive leadership.
  5. Slow speed of sales
  6. Quick solution of queries.

Question 5.
How does branding help in creating product differentiation ? Does it help in marketing of goods and services ? Explain.
Answer:
Branding helps a firm of distinguishing its products from that of its competitors. This helps the firm to secure and control the market for its products. If products were sold by generic names, it would be very difficult for the marketers to distinguish their products from its competitors. Thus, most marketers give a name of their product, which helps in identifying and distinguishing their products from their competitors product. This process of giving a name or a sign or symbol etc. to a product is called Branding.

Question 6.
What are the factors affecting determination of the price of a product or service ? Explain.
Answer:
There are number of factors which affect the fixation of the price of a product. Some of the important factors in this regard are discussed as below :

(i) Product Cost: The cost sets the minimum level or the floor price at which the product may be sold. There are broadly three types of cost-fixed costs, variable costs and semivariable cost. Total cost is the sum of all these three. Generally, all firms try to cover all their costs, at least in the log sun. In addition, they aim at earning a margin of profit over and above the costs.

(ii) The utility and Demand : The utility provided by the product and the intensity of demand of the buyer sets the upper limit of price. Which a buyer would be prepared to pay. Infect the price must reflect the interest of both the parties to the transaction the buyer and the seller. The buyer may be ready to pay up to the point, where the utility from the product is atleast equal to the sacrifice made in terms of the price paid. The seller would, however, try to cover the costs. According to the law of demand, consumers generally purchase more units at a low price than at a high price.

(iii) The Extent of Competition in the Market : The price is also affected by the nature and degree of competition. The price will tend to reach the upper limit in case there is less degree of competition while under free competition, the price will tend to be set at the lowest level.

(iv) Government and Legal Regulations : In order to profit the interest of public against unfair practices in the field of price fixing, Government can intervenes and regulate the price of commodities. Government can declare a product as essential product and regulate its price.

(v) Pricing objectives : Pricing objectives are another important factor affecting the fixation of the price of a product or a service. Apart from price maximization, the pricing objectives of a firm may include,

(a) Obtaining Market Share Leadership : If a firm objective is to obtain share of the market, it will keep the price of its products at lower level, so that greater number of people are attracted to purchase the products.

(b) Surviving in a competitive Market: If a firm is facing difficulties surviving in the market because of intense competition or introduction of a more efficient substitute by a competitor.

(c) Attaining Product Quality Leadership : Higher prices are charged to cover high in this case, normally quality and high cost of R & D (Research and Development)

(vi) Marketing Methods used Price Fixation : Price is also affected by other elements of marketing such as distribution system, quality of salesman employed, quality and amount
of advertising, sales promotion efforts, the type of packaging, product differentiation, credit facility and customer service provided.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
What do you mean by Channels of distribution’ ? What functions do they play in the distribution of goods and services ? Explain.
Answer:
People, institutions, merchants and functionaries, who take part in the distribution of goods and services are called ‘Channels of distribution’. Channels of distribution are set of firms and individuals that take title or assist in transferring title, to particular goods or services as it moves from the producers to the consumers.
Channels of distribution smoothen the flow of goods by creating possession, place and time utilities. They facilitate movement of goods by overcoming various barriers the important function performed by middlemen are : –

(i) Sorting : Middlemen procure supplies of goods from a variety of sources which is often not of the same quality, nature and size. These goods are sorted into, homogeneous groups on the basis of the size or quality.

(ii) Accumulation : The function involves accumulation of goods into larger homogeneous stock which help in maintaining continuous flow of supply.

(iii) Allocation : Allocation involves breaking homogeneous stock into smaller, marketable.

(iv) Assorting : Middlemen build assortment of products for resale. There is usually a difference between the product lines made by manufactures and the assortment or combination desired by the users. Middlemen produce variety of goods from different sources and delivers them in combinations, desired by customers.

(v) Product Promotion : Middlemen also participate in some sales promotion activities, such as demonstration, special display, contests, etc. to increase the sales of products.

(vi) Negotiation : Channels operate with manufactures on the one hand and customer on the other. They negotiate the price, quality, guarantee and other related matters with customers, so that transfer of ownership is properly affected.

(vii) Risk Taking : In the process of distribution of goods, the merchant middlemen take title of the goods and thereby assume risks on account of price and demand fluctuations, spoilage, destinations, etc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Explain the major Activities involved in the physical distribution at products.
Answer:
Physical distribution covers all the activities required to physically move goods from manufacture to the customers. Important activities involved in the physical distribution include transportation, warehousing, material handing and inventory control.

(i) Order Processing : In a typical buyer-seller relationship order placement is the first step. Products flow from the manufactures to customers via channel members while orders flow from customers to manufactures. Therefore, a good speedy and accurate system of order processing becomes a necessity.

(ii) Transportation : Transportation is the means of carrying goods and raw materials from the point of production to the point of sale. It is one of the major element in physical distribution Of goods. It is important because unless the goods are physically made available the sale can not be completed.

(iii) Warehousing : Warehousing refers to the act of storing and assorting products in order to create time utility in them. The basic purpose of warehousing activities is to arrange placement of goods and provide facilities to store them. The need for warehousing arises because there may be differences between the times, a product is produced and the time it is required for consumption. Generally, the efficiency of a firm in serving its customers will depend on, where these warehouses are located and where are these to be delivered.

(iv) Inventory Control: A very important decision in respect of inventory is deciding about the level of inventory. Higher the level of inventory, higher will be the level of service to customers but the cost of carrying the inventory will also be high because lot of capital

would be tied up in the stock. The decision regarding level of inventory involves prediction about the demand for the product. A correct estimate of the demand helps to hold inventor and cost level down to a minimum. The major factors determining inventory levels include.

(a) Finns policy regarding the level of customer service. Higher the level of service, greater will be need to keep more inventories.

(b) Degree of accuracy of the sales forecast. In case more accurate estimates are available, the need for keeping very high level of inventory can be minimized.

(c) Responsiveness of the distribution system i.e., ability of the system to transmit inventory needs back to the factory and get products to the market.

(d) Cost of inventory, which includes holding cost, such as cost of warehousing, tied up capital, etc. and the manufacturing cost.

Question 9.
Expenditure on advertising is a social waste. Do you agree ?
Answer:
The opponents of advertising say that the expenditure on advertising is a social waste as it adds to the cost, multiplies the needs of the people and undermines social values. The proponents, however argue that advertising is very useful as it increases the reach, brings the per unit cost of production down and adds to the growth of the economy.
Following are the point of criticism :

(i) Adds to cost: The opponents of advertising argue that advertising unnecessarily adds to the cost product, which is ultimately passed on to the buyers in the form of high prices. It is line that advertisement of a product cost lots of money but it helps to increase the demand for the product as large number and potential buyers come to know about the availability of the products, its features, etc. and persuaded to buy it.

This increases the demand and therefore the production. As a result, the per unit cost of production comes down as the total cost is divided by larger number of units.

(ii) Undermines Social Values : Advertising undermines social values and promotes materialism. It breeds discontentment among people as they come to know about new products and feel dissatisfied with their present state of affairs. This criticism is not entirely time. Advertisement in fact helps buyer by informing them about the new products which may be improvement over the existing products.

(iii) Confuses the buyers : Another criticism against advertisements is that so many products are being advertised which makes similar claims that the buyer gets confused as to which one is true and which should be relied upon, e.g., there are so many brands of soaps, shampoos, cars, Tvs, cell phones etc. which are advertised.

The supporters of advertisement, however argued that we are all rational human beings who make our decisions for purchase of products on factors, such as price, style, size etc. Thus the buyers can clear their confusion by analyzing the information provided on the advertisements and other sources before taking a decision to purchase a product.

(iv) Encourages Sales of Inferior Product: Advertising does not distinguish between superior and inferior products and persuade people to purchase even the inferiors products. The desired level of quality will depend on the economic states and preference of the target customers. Advertisements sell products of a given quality and the buyers will buy, if it suits their requirements.

(v) Some advertisements are in Bad Taste : Another criticism against advertising is that some advertisements are in bad taste. They show something which is not approved by some people. Some advertisement spoil the relationship between employer and employee, husband and wife etc.

From the above discussion, we have learnt that through advertisements are criticized but still they have their own advantages. It is not a social waste, rather it adds value of the social cause by giving a boost to production and generating employment.

MP Board Solutions

Question 10.
Write the differences between advertise and personal selling,
Answer:
Differences between Advertising and Personal Selling :
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 11 Marketing Management image - 3
Question 11.
Differentiate between Marketing and Selling.
Answer:
Differences between Selling and Marketing :

Selling

  1. Focus is on seller’s need.
  2. Product enjoys supreme importance.
  3. Concerned with selling the goods already produced.
  4. Presupposes existence of demand.
  5. It is fragmented approach to achieve immediate gains.
  6. Converting products into cash.
  7. Caveat import Let the buyer beware,beware, implies in selling.
  8. Profit through sales volume, is made in selling.

Marketing

  1. Focus is done on customer’s need.
  2. Customer enjoys supreme importance.
  3. Product planning and development to match product with markets.
  4. Demand has to be created and main- trained.
  5. It is integrated approach to achieve long-term goals.
  6. Marketing is converting customer’s needs into products.
  7. Caveat vender Let the seller beware,implies in marketing.
  8. Profit through customer’s satisfaction,is made in marketing.

Question 12.
What do you mean by labelling ? Write its advantages.
Answer:
Meaning :Label on a product provides detailed informaition about the product, its contents, methods of use etc. the various functions perform med by a label are as follows :

(i) Describe the product and specify its contents one of the most important functions
of labels in that it describe the product, its us age, cautions in the use, etc. and specify its contents.

(ii) Identification of the product or Br and a label helps in identifying the product or brand e.g., we can easily pick our favourite soap from a lumber of packages only because of its label.

(iii) Grading of products labels help grading the products into different categories. Sometimes, marketers assign different grades to indicate features or quality of the product e.g., different type of tea is sold by some brands under “Fellow, Red and Green lable categories.

(iv) Help in promotion of an important function of label is to aid in promotion of the products. A carefully deslgned label can a the customer to purchase. So, many labels provide promotional me usages, some shove discount or other schemes etc.

(v) Providing information required by law: Another important function of labelling is to provide information required by , raw e.g., the statutory warning on the package of cigarette or pan masala ‘Smoking is injuring to health’ or ‘Chewing tobacco causes cancer.

Advantages : Labelling has the following advantages :

  1. Useful Information : Labelling provides useful information regarding the name of product, address of manufacturer or dealer, contents, ingrediants, safety warning, etc.
  2. Helps in Identification : It helps to identify the product or brand.
  3. Helps in Grading : It enables the producer to grade his product into various categories. .
  4. Control Price Fluctuation : Since the price printed on the labels, variations in price are avoided.

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
Explain the factors affecting marketing mix.
Answer:
The factors affecting marketing mix are :

1. Planning and development of product: Planning and development of product is one of the important factors of marketing mix. An ideal enterprise makes an ideal plan for a product. Nowadays customer demands will designed, fashionable and high quality product. This is possible only when the factor of planning and development of product is included in the manufacturing of a product for an enterprise.

2. Pricing : The price of a product affect the marketing of any product. If the price is fixed high then product will be eliminated from market and if price is fixed less then enterprise will face losses. The ups and downs in prices directly affect the marketing. The prices are fixed after considering different factors in marketing.

3. Distribution channels : Channel of distribution refers to that path through which products reach ultimate consumers. Many people and firms participate in this path. In distribution channel it is seen that what should be the medium of sales, where it will take place, direct sales or through middle men, sales will be local or product will be sent to other places are important factors for marketing mix.

4. Sales promotion : Today in this marketing system* a good product cannot be sold without an effective advertisement. Apart from advertisement there are other methods of sales promotion. Thus an ideal sales promoter for. increasing the demand of products makes marketing programmes because without promotion a business cannot develop. The functions included in sales promotion are advertisement, publicity, public relations, etc.

5. Sales force : The complete management of sales force is performed as a factor of marketing mix. Under sales force fixation of sales limit, nature of sales, personal selling limit, consumer services are included in marketing mix.

6. Marketing research : Marketing research is having an important place as a factor in marketing mix. In this estimates are made after identifying the interest of consumers, demand of products is determined, knowing the reactions of consumers about products, etc. Tor all these activities research and survey is essential. It is also considered as a factor of marketing mix.

Question 14.
Describe the factors to be considered while selecting a medium of advertising.
Answer:
The following factors must be considered while selecting a medium of a advertising:

1. Nature of market : Nature of market means the place where the customer lives. Advertising should be done through such medium that it reaches customers. If the market is in nations, it is better to advertise through radio, television, etc. But if the market is local, than it is better to advertise through local newspapers, magazines, etc.

2. Distribution system : While selecting the medium of advertisement the distribution system should be kept in mind. The place where proper channel of distribution is not present it is waste to advertise the product there. Advertising should be done where proper channel of distribution is managed.

3. Media cost: Media cost means what is the cost of advertisement ? The medium should be selected which is comparatively cheap, also properly covers. The customers and generates the demand of products.

4. Number of audience : Number of audience here means to whom the advertisement reaches and what is the number ? Audience are of various types like male, females, children, teenager, etc. If customers are females the medium of advertisement should be magazines, television, etc.

5. Level, of audience : The audience of advertisement are of different types and level like rich class people, middle class people or lower class people. If the advertisement is to reach rich class society then medium of advertisement will be television, internet, magazines,etc. For middle class medium of advertisement can be TV., Radio, etc.

6. Nature of goods : Goods are of various types like goods for consumption, industrial goods, office equipment, etc. For these types of goods there are different types of medium of advertisement.

7. Objectives of advertisement: It is necessary to know the objectives of advertisement before giving the advertisement. This is done to select the best possible medium of advertisement.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
what are the Qualities of good salesman ?
Answer:
Essential qualities of an effective salesman are :

1. Personality : A good salesman should possess a good personality. What fragrance is to a flower is personality to an individual. It is the ability to impress others. A charming personality always creates a good impression. He should possess good health, attractive appearance and impressive voice. He should not suffer from physical handicaps like stammering and limping, etc.

2. Cheerful Disposition : He should have a smiling face. It is rightly said that ‘a man without a smiling face must not open a shop. In order to impress upon the customers he should always be cheerful and sweet tempered. He should be properly dressed as the dress greatly enhances the personality.

3. Mental Ingredients : An individual cannot be a successful salesman unless he possesses certain mental qualities like imagination, sound judgment, presence of mind, foresightedness, initiative and strong memory. These qualities are of great help to a salesman in dealing with customers having different nature and temperament. He can successfully tackle the customers. The mental qualities are very helpful in creating permanent customers for the product.

4. Courtesy: A salesman should always be polite and courteous towards his customers. It costs nothing but wins permanent customers for the product. He should help the customers in making the right choice or in selecting the products. This will definitely help in winning over the confidence of the customers.

MP Board Class 12 Business Studies Important Questions

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 3 प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 3 प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण

प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण Important Questions

प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए-

प्रश्न 1.
निम्न में से कौन -सी व्यावसायिक पर्यावरण की विशेषता नहीं है –
(a) शहरीकरण
(b) कर्मचारी
(c) तुलनात्मकता
(d) अनिवार्यता।
उत्तर:
(b) कर्मचारी

प्रश्न 2.
निम्न में कौन -व्यावसायिक पर्यावरण का सर्वश्रेष्ठ द्योतक है –
(a) पहचान करना
(b) निष्पादन में सुधार
(c) हो रहे परिवर्तनों का सामना
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।
उत्तर:
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।

प्रश्न 3.
निम्न में कौन -सा सामाजिक पर्यावरण का उदाहरण है –
(a) अर्थव्यवस्था में धन की आपूर्ति
(b) उपभोक्ता संरक्षण अधिनियम
(c) देश की संरचना
(d) परिवार का गठन
उत्तर:
(d) परिवार का गठन

प्रश्न 4.
उदारीकरण का अर्थ है –
(a) अर्थव्यवस्थाओं के बीच एकात्मकता
(b) सरकारी बाध्यता एवं संशोधन में कमी
(c) योजनाबद्ध विनिवेश नीति
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(b) सरकारी बाध्यता एवं संशोधन में कमी

प्रश्न 5.
जनसंख्या के आकार एवं वितरण को माना जाता है –
(a) टेक्नॉलॉजीकल परिवेश का अंग
(b) कानूनी परिवेश का अंग
(c) राजनैतिक परिवेश का अंग
(d) सामाजिक परिवेश का अंग
उत्तर:
(d) सामाजिक परिवेश का अंग

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.
रिक्त स्थानों की पूर्ति कीजिए

  1. आधुनिक टेक्नॉलॉजी अर्थव्यवस्था के शीघ्र विकास में …………. होती है।
  2. प्रथम पंचवर्षीय योजना …………. से प्रारंभ की गई थी।
  3. भारत में नये आर्थिक सुधारों का प्रारंभ …………… से किया गया।
  4. व्यवसाय के ……………………. घटक नियंत्रणीय होते हैं।
  5. भारत में …………………..आर्थिक प्रणाली को अपनाया गया है।
  6. अंतर्राष्ट्रीय परिवेश सदैव ………….. रहता है।
  7. कानूनी परिवेश का संबंध सरकार द्वारा पारित ………. से होता है।

उत्तर:

  1. सहायक
  2. 1 अप्रैल 1951
  3. सन् 1991
  4. आंतरिक
  5. मिश्रित
  6. परिवर्तनशील
  7. अधिनियम।

प्रश्न 3.
एक शब्द या वाक्य में उत्तर दीजिए

  1. वैश्वीकरण का क्या अर्थ है ?
  2. लोगों को रोजगार उपलब्ध कराने के लिए बनाई गई नीति को क्या कहते हैं ?
  3. विदेश नीति, किस व्यावसायिक वातावरण का घटक है ?
  4. EPCG स्कीम का पूरा नाम क्या है ?
  5. निर्यात को प्रोत्साहित करने हेतु स्थापित व्यावसायिक क्षेत्र को क्या कहते हैं ?

उत्तर:

  1. विश्व की अर्थव्यवस्थाओं का एकीकरण
  2. रोजगार नीति
  3. राजनैतिक
  4. निर्यात संवर्द्धन सामान योजना
  5. निर्यात संवर्द्धन नीति।

प्रश्न 4.
सत्य या असत्य बताइये-

  1. उदारीकरण भारत में व्यवसाय तथा उद्योग को प्रभावित करने में असफल रहा है।
  2. आर्थिक सामाजिक तथा राजनीतिक परिस्थितियाँ व्यावसायिक वातावरण का निर्माण करती हैं।
  3. वैश्वीकरण ने भारत में व्यवसाय तथा उद्योग को प्रभावित किया है। ।
  4. बाहरी घटक व्यावसायिक वातावरण को प्रभावित नहीं करते।
  5. सरकारी नीति में परिवर्तनों का व्यवसाय तथा उद्योग पर प्रभाव नहीं पड़ता है।

उत्तर:

  1. असत्य
  2. सत्य
  3. सत्य
  4. असत्य
  5. असत्य।

प्रश्न 5.
सही जोड़ी बनाइये-
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 3 प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण - 1

प्रबंध एवं व्यावसायिक वातावरण अति लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
व्यावसायिक वातावरण के संदर्भ में LPG का क्या अर्थ है ?
उत्तर:
L- Liberalisation उदारीकरण
P- Privatisation निजीकरण
G- Globalisation वैश्वीकरण

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.
फेरा (FERA) तथा फेमा (FEMA) का पूरा नाम लिखिए।भारत में नई औद्योगिक नीति के अंतर्गत किस नियम को समाप्त करके FEMA लागू किया गया ?
उत्तर:
FERA – Foreign Exchange Regulation Act
FEMA – Foreign Exchange Management Act.
भारत में नई औद्योगिक नीति के अंतर्गत FERA को समाप्त करके FEMA लागू किया गया।

प्रश्न 3.
व्यष्टि (सूक्ष्म) तथा समष्टि (व्यापक) वातावरण से क्या अभिप्राय है?
उत्तर:
व्यष्टि (सूक्ष्म) वातावरण-इसका अभिप्राय उस पर्यावरण या वातावरण से है जिसके अंतर्गत उन घटकों को सम्मिलित किया जाता है जिनका व्यवसाय के साथ नजदीकी संबंध होता है।

समष्टि (व्यापक) वातावरण-इसका अभिप्राय उस वातावरण से है जिसके अंतर्गत उन घटकों को सम्मिलत किया जाता है जिनका व्यवसाय के साथ दूर का संबंध होता है।

प्रश्न 4.
सामान्य तथा विशिष्ट पर्यावरण में अंतर स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
सामान्य तथा विशिष्ट पर्यावरण में अंतर-

सामान्य पर्यावरण

  1. सामान्य पर्यावरण वह है जो फर्मों को अप्रत्यक्ष रूप से प्रभावित करता है।
  2. इसमें सामान्य शक्तियाँ शामिल होती हैं।
  3. इसके घटक हैं-सामाजिक पर्यावरण, राजनैतिक पर्यावरण l

विशिष्ट पर्यावरण

  1. विशिष्ट पर्यावरण उस पर्यावरण को कहते हैं। जो फर्मों को अप्रत्यक्ष रूप से प्रभावित करता है।
  2. इसमें विशिष्ट शक्तियाँ शामिल होती हैं।
  3. इसके घटक हैं-ग्राहक, जनता, पूर्तिकर्ता,विपणन मध्यस्थ आदि।

प्रश्न 5.
भारत सरकार को नई आर्थिक नीति किन कारणों से अपनानी पड़ी?
उत्तर:
भारत को नई आर्थिक नीति को अपनाने के निम्न कारण थे –

  1. राजकोषीय संकट
  2. आंतरिक ऋण में वृद्धि
  3. मुद्रा स्फीति में वृद्धि
  4. विदेशी विनिमय संचय में गिरावट
  5. रुपये के मूल्य में कमी
  6. नकारात्मक भुगतान संतुलन
  7. भारतीय रिजर्व बैंक तथा भारतीय स्टेट बैंक द्वारा सोना बंधक रखना।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 6.
भारतीय कानूनी पर्यावरण के कोई तीन उदाहरण दीजिए जिन्होंने व्यवसाय को प्रभावित किया है।
उत्तर:
भारतीय कानूनी पर्यावरण ने व्यवसाय को निम्न प्रकार से प्रभावित किया है

  1. नशा संबंधी उत्पाद का विज्ञापन करना प्रतिबंधित है।
  2. उद्योगों की लाइसेंस से मुक्ति की नीति।
  3. तम्बाकू उत्पादों पर वैधानिक चेतावनी होना आवश्यक है।

प्रश्न 7.
उन्नत तकनीकी में किन-किन बातों पर जोर दिया जाता है ?
उत्तर:
उन्नत तकनीकी में निम्न बातों पर जोर दिया जाता है

  1. वैज्ञानिक शोध
  2. नव-प्रवर्तन
  3. आविष्कार
  4. सुधार
  5. नव-प्रवर्तन का प्रसार।

प्रश्न 8.
सन् 1991 के पश्चात् भारत के आर्थिक परिवेश में जो परिवर्तन हुए उनके नाम लिखिए।
उत्तर:
सन् 1991 के पश्चात् भारत के आर्थिक परिवेश में जो परिवर्तन हुए उनके नाम निम्न हैं

  1. आधुनिकीकरण
  2. निजीकरण
  3. वैश्वीकरण
  4. उदारीकरण।

प्रश्न 9.
भारत में नई आर्थिक नीति को अपनाये जाने के क्या कारण थे?
उत्तर:
भारत में नई आर्थिक नीति को अपनाये जाने के निम्न कारण थे

  1. विदेशी विनिमय की कमी
  2. उच्च सरकारी घाटा
  3. बढ़ती हुई कीमतें
  4. आन्तरिक ऋण में वृद्धि
  5. विदेशी व्यापार में गिरावट।

प्रश्न 10.
1956 की औद्योगिक नीति में उद्योगों का वर्गीकरण किस प्रकार किया गया था ?
उत्तर:
1956 की औद्योगिक नीति को तीन वर्गों में बाँटा गया था

  1. प्रथम वर्ग-प्रथम वर्ग में वे उद्योग रखे गये थे, जिनका विकास केवल राज्य द्वारा होता है।
  2. द्वितीय वर्ग-इस वर्ग में वे उद्योग रखे गये थे जो राज्यों के स्वामित्व में चले जाएँगे तथा भविष्य में नये कारखानों की स्थापना राज्य द्वारा ही की जायेगी।-
  3. तृतीय वर्ग-तृतीय वर्ग में शेष उद्योग रखे गये थे। ये उद्योग मुख्य रूप से उपभोक्ता वस्तुओं का उत्पादन करने वाले उद्योग थे।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 11.
नई आर्थिक नीति में किन-किन उद्योगों के लिये लाइसेंस लेना अनिवार्य है ?
उत्तर:
नई आर्थिक नीति में, वर्तमान में छः उद्योगों के लिये लाइसेंस लेना अनिवार्य है जो कि निम्नांकित हैं-

  1. खतरनाक रसायन
  2. सिगरेट
  3. ड्रग्स एवं फार्मास्युटिकल्स
  4. एल्कोहॉलिक पेय
  5. प्रतिरक्षा उपकरण
  6. औद्योगिक विस्फोटक।

प्रश्न 12.
भारत की चार आर्थिक नीतियों के नाम बताइये।
उत्तर:
भारत की चार आर्थिक नीतियाँ निम्न हैं

  1. आयात-निर्यात नीति
  2. रोजगार नीति
  3. औद्योगिक नीति
  4. कृषि नीति
  5. विदेशी विनियोग नीति
  6. कर नीति।

प्रश्न 13.
सन् 1991 के पश्चात् भारत के आर्थिक परिवेश की विवेचना कीजिए।
उत्तर:
सन् 1991 के पश्चात्, भारत के आर्थिक परिवेश में अनेक क्रांतिकारी परिवर्तन हुए। सरकार ने व्यवसाय तथा उद्योग से संबंधित नीतियों में अनेक परिवर्तन किये, जिनमें से प्रमुख निम्नलिखित हैं

  1. नई औद्योगिक नीति की घोषणा- उद्योगों को लाइसेंस मुक्त कर विभिन्न उद्योगों के लिए पूँजी की सीमा समाप्त कर दी गई।
  2. नई व्यापार नीति-व्यापार में न्यूनतम प्रतिबंध, न्यूनतम प्रशासनिक नियम नियंत्रण सुनिश्चित किया गया।
  3. पूँजी बाजार में सुधार-भारतीय प्रतिभूति एवं विनिमय बोर्ड की स्थापना।
  4. राजकोषीय नीति में सुधार-सार्वजनिक व्ययों पर नियंत्रण तथा सभी राज्यों में ‘वैट ‘ योजना लागू करना।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 14.
नवीन मौद्रिक नीति पर प्रकाश डालिये।
उत्तर:
उदारीकरण करने तथा अन्तर्राष्ट्रीय व्यापार बढ़ाने के लिये सरकार द्वारा मौद्रिक नीति में सुधार करने हेतु नरसिंहम समिति गठित की गई जिसमें निम्न सिफारिशें पेश की गई

  1. ब्याज दरों का निर्धारण स्वतंत्र रूप से किया जाये अर्थात् इसमें रिजर्व बैंक का हस्तक्षेप न हो।
  2. बैंकिंग पद्धति की संरचना नये ढंग से की जाये।
  3. बैंकों को अधिक स्वतंत्रता प्रदान की जाये।

प्रश्न 15.
व्यावसायिक वातावरण से आपका क्या आशय है ?
उत्तर:
व्यावसायिक वातावरण दो शब्दों का संयोजन है। व्यावसायिक शब्द का अर्थ है व्यवसाय से संबंधित तथा वातावरण का अर्थ है वे समस्त बाह्य शक्तियाँ जिनका प्रभाव व्यवसाय के संचालन पर पड़ता है। व्यावसायिक वातावरण सामाजिक, आर्थिक, राजनैतिक, कानूनी तथा तकनीकी घटकों का मिश्रण है।

प्रश्न 16.
व्यावसायिक उद्यमों के लिए अपने पर्यावरण को समझना क्यों महत्वपूर्ण है ? स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
व्यावसायिक पर्यावरण से आशय सभी व्यक्ति, संस्थाओं तथा अन्य शक्तियों से है जो व्यावसायिक संगठन को प्रभावित करते हैं। जैसे-सरकारी नीतियाँ, तकनीकी परिवर्तन, सामाजिक तथा राजनैतिक परिस्थितियाँ। व्यवसाय के प्रबंधकों को अपने पर्यावरण को समझना इसलिए आवश्यक है क्योंकि वे बाहरी शक्तियों को पहचानकर उनसे अपना बचाव कर सकें। निम्नलिखित कारणों से भी व्यावसायिक उपक्रम के लिए अपने आसपास के पर्यावरण को समझना आवश्यक होता है

  1. भविष्य के लिए मार्ग को निर्धारित करने में सहायक
  2. प्रतियोगिता का सामना करने के लिए,
  3. तेजी से हो रहे परिवर्तनों से सुरक्षा के लिए
  4. अवसरों की पहचान करना।

प्रश्न 17.
व्यावसायिक वातावरण के विभिन्न आयाम लिखिए।
उत्तर:
व्यावसायिक वातावरण के आयाम निम्न हैं

  1. जनसंख्या संबंधी परिवेश
  2. भौतिक परिवेश
  3. आर्थिक परिवेश
  4. सामाजिक परिवेश।

प्रश्न 18.
वैश्वीकरण के कोई दो उद्देश्य लिखिए।
उत्तर:
वैश्वीकरण के दो उद्देश्य निम्न हैं

  1. अकुशलता को दूर करना-उद्योगों तथा फर्मों की अकुशलता को दूर करना वैश्वीकरण का प्रमुख उद्देश्य है।
  2. उत्पादकता में वृद्धि-अल्पविकसित राष्ट्रों में संसाधनों के आबंटन में सुधार लाना है, इसमें पूँजी उत्पाद अनुपात कम होगा और श्रम की उत्पादकता बढ़ेगी।

प्रश्न 19.
व्यवसाय के आंतरिक वातावरण को स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
व्यावसायिक वातावरण के वे घटक जिनका निर्धारण संस्था द्वारा होता है उसे आंतरिक घटक (वातावरण) कहते हैं। ये घटक नियंत्रणीय होते हैं जिनका व्यवसाय पर प्रत्यक्ष प्रभाव पड़ता है एवं इनमें आवश्यकतानुसार परिवर्तन किया जा सकता है। ये घटक इस प्रकार हैं

  1. व्यवसाय की नीतियाँ, नियम व योजनाएँ
  2. व्यवसाय के उद्देश्य, लक्ष्य एवं दृष्टिकोण
  3. व्यवसाय की उत्पादन प्रणाली
  4. व्यवसाय के साधन, संसाधन ।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 20.
व्यवसाय के सामाजिक वातावरण को समझाइये।
उत्तर:
सामाजिक वातावरण का आशय समाज में होने वाली समस्त गतिविधियों से है। इन गतिविधियों में सांस्कृतिक गतिविधियाँ भी सम्मिलित हैं। व्यवसाय की समस्त गतिविधियाँ व क्रियायें समाज के अन्दर ही की जाती है अर्थात् व्यवसाय भी एक सामाजिक कार्य है। समाज में जाति, धर्म, लिंग, परिवार, समूह आदि से सम्बन्धित क्रियायें होती हैं। इन समस्त क्रियाओं का प्रभाव व्यवसाय पर पड़ता है। अर्थात् सामाजिक वातावरण का प्रभाव व्यावसायिक परिस्थितियों पर अवश्य पड़ता है। सामाजिक वातावरण के प्रमुख घटक निम्न हैं जिनसे व्यावसायिक वातावरण प्रभावित होता है

  1. परिवार की संरचना एवं भूमिका
  2. समाज में जाति एवं वर्ग व्यवस्था

प्रश्न 21.
व्यवसाय के वैधानिक नियामक पर प्रकाश डालिये।
उत्तर:
कानून विधान या नियमावली सर्वशक्तिमान होते हैं इनके अनुसार कार्य न करने पर व्यक्ति दण्ड का भागी होता है। इसलिये वैधानिक नियमों का व्यवसाय पर बहुत अधिक प्रभाव पड़ता है। व्यवसाय के संचालन के लिये सुरक्षा व अधिकारों से रक्षा आवश्यक है जो केवल वैधानिक नियमों से ही हो सकती है। वैधानिक वातावरण से व्यवसाय को संरक्षण मिलता है । वैधानिक वातावरण का क्षेत्र काफी विस्तृत हो रहा है तथा सम्पूर्ण आर्थिक जगत पर इससे नियन्त्रण रखा जा सकता है। वैधानिक वातावरण का निर्माण करने वाले या घटक जो व्यवसाय को प्रभावित करते हैं, वे निम्नानुसार हैं

  1. संवैधानिक प्रावधान
  2. व्यापारिक सन्नियम
  3. आर्थिक सन्नियम
  4. श्रम सन्नियम।

प्रश्न 22.
बाह्य वातावरण से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
उत्तर:
किसी वातावरण में ऐसे घटक या तत्त्व जिनका अर्थ (मुद्रा) से सम्बन्ध नहीं रहता है और वे व्यवसाय के बाहर की परिस्थितियाँ निर्मित करते हैं, उन्हें अनार्थिक बाह्य वातावरण के नाम से जाना जाता है। ये अनार्थिक या गैर आर्थिक घटक निम्न होते हैं

  1. राजनैतिक वातावरण
  2. सामाजिक वातावरण
  3. वैधानिक वातावरण
  4. भौतिक वातावरण
  5. शैक्षिक वातावरण
  6. नैतिक वातावरण
  7. सांस्कृतिक वातावरण
  8. अन्तर्राष्ट्रीय वातावरण
  9. ऐतिहासिक वातावरण
  10. तकनीकी वातावरण।

MP Board Class 12 Business Studies Important Questions

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 10 भुगतान संतुलन

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 10 भुगतान संतुलन

भुगतान संतुलन Important Questions

भुगतान संतुलन वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए –

प्रश्न (a)
भुगतान शेष की संरचना में निम्नलिखित में कौन – से खाते सम्मिलित होते हैं –
(a) चालू खाता
(b) पूँजी खाता
(c) और (b) दोनों
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) और (b) दोनों

प्रश्न (b)
व्यापार सन्तुलन का अर्थ होता है –
(a) पूँजी के लेन – देन से
(b) वस्तुओं के आयात व निर्यात से
(c) कुल क्रेडिट तथा डेबिट से
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।
उत्तर:
(b) वस्तुओं के आयात व निर्यात से

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न (c)
भुगतान शेष की संरचना में निम्नलिखित में कौन – से खाते सम्मिलित होते हैं –
(a) चालू खाता
(b) पूँजी खाता
(c) (a) और (b) दोनों
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) (a) और (b) दोनों

प्रश्न (d)
प्रतिकूल भुगतान सन्तुलन में सुधार का उपाय है –
(a) मुद्रा अवमूल्यन
(b) आयात प्रतिस्थापन
(c) विनिमय नियंत्रण
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।
उत्तर:
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।

प्रश्न (e)
विदेशी विनिमय दर का निर्धारण होता है –
(a) विदेशी करेंसी की माँग द्वारा
(b) विदेशी करेंसी की पूर्ति द्वारा
(c) विदेशी विनिमय बाजार में माँग एवं पूर्ति द्वारा
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) विदेशी विनिमय बाजार में माँग एवं पूर्ति द्वारा

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न (f)
विदेशी विनिमय बाजार के रूप हैं –
(a) हाजिर या चालू बाजार
(b) वायदा बाजार
(c) (a) और (b) दोनों
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) (a) और (b) दोनों

प्रश्न 2.
रिक्त स्थानों की पूर्ति कीजिए –

  1. ब्रेटन वुड्स प्रणाली को ……………………….. सीमा प्रणाली भी कहा जाता है।
  2. विदेशी विनिमय दर एवं विदेशी विनिमय की पूर्ति में ………………………….. संबंध होता है।
  3. अवमूल्यन से देश की मुद्रा की विनिमय क्रयशक्ति ………………………….. हो जाती है।
  4. व्यापार संतुलन में केवल …………………………… मदों को शामिल किया जाता है।
  5. भुगतान – संतुलन सदैव ………………………….. में रहता है।
  6. एक देश की मुद्रा का दूसरे देश की मुद्रा में व्यक्ति मूल्य ………………………….. कहलाता है।

उत्तर:

  1. समंजनीय
  2. सीधा
  3. कम
  4. दृश्य
  5. संतुलन
  6. विनिमय दर।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 3.
सत्य /असत्य बताइये –

  1. व्यापार संतुलन में दृश्य मदों तथा अदृश्य मदों दोनों का समावेश किया जाता है।
  2. व्यापार संतुलन भुगतान संतुलन का एक अंग है।
  3. अवमूल्यन की घोषणा सरकार द्वारा की जाती है।
  4. भुगतान संतुलन सदैव सन्तुलित रहता है।
  5. निर्यात प्रोत्साहन हेतु अवमूल्यन का सहारा लिया जाता है।
  6. विकासशील देशों में तेजी से बढ़ती हुई जनसंख्या का आर्थिक विकास पर अनुकूल प्रभाव पड़ता है।
  7. भुगतान संतुलन करने का एक उपाय निर्यात प्रोत्साहन भी है।

उत्तर:

  1. असत्य
  2. सत्य
  3. सत्य
  4. सत्य
  5. सत्य
  6. असत्य
  7. असत्य।

प्रश्न 4.
सही जोड़ियाँ बनाइये –

उत्तर:

  1. (b)
  2. (c)
  3. (a)
  4. (e)
  5. (d).

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 5.
एक शब्द/वाक्य में उत्तर दीजिये –

  1. नई व्यापार नीति की घोषणा किस सन में की गई?
  2. भारतीय रुपये के अवमूल्यन से भारतीयों के आयात कैसे हो जायेंगे?
  3. दीर्घकाल में आयात किसका भुगतान करते हैं?
  4. पूँजी खाते से किस बात का ज्ञान होता है?
  5. एक देश की मुद्रा का दूसरे देश की मुद्रा में व्यक्त मूल्य क्या कहलाता है?

उत्तर:

  1. 1991
  2. महँगे
  3. निर्यात का
  4. अंतर्राष्ट्रीय विनियोग व ऋणग्रस्तता का
  5. विनिमय दर।

भुगतान संतुलन लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
स्थिर विनिमय दर से आप क्या समझते हैं?
उत्तर:
स्थिर विनिमय दर से तात्पर्य उस दर से है जो अन्तर्राष्ट्रीय व्यापार में स्थिर बनी रहती है। सन् 1944 में अन्तर्राष्ट्रीय मुद्रा कोष की स्थापना के साथ एवं विश्वव्यापी मंदी एवं स्वर्णमान, के पतन के परिणामस्वरूप विनिमय दरों में स्थिरता की प्रवृत्ति बढ़ी। इस दर को अधिकीलित दर भी कहा जाता है। इसे निम्न चित्र से स्पष्ट किया जा सकता हैइस विनिमय दर व्यवस्था में दर का निर्धारण सरकार के द्वारा किया जाता है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 10 भुगतान संतुलन img 2

प्रश्न 2.
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर क्या है?
उत्तर:
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर वह दर है जो केन्द्रीय बैंक के हस्तक्षेप के बिना विदेशी विनिमय की माँग और पूर्ति में साम्य स्थापित करती है। जिस बिन्दु पर विदेशी विनिमय की माँग एवं पूर्ति की शक्तियों के द्वारा दर निर्धारित हो वह साम्य या लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर कहलाती है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 10 भुगतान संतुलन img 3
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 10 भुगतान संतुलन img 4

प्रश्न 3.
भुगतान संतुलन से क्या आशय है? भारत के भुगतान संतुलन की प्रतिकूलता के तीन कारण लिखिए?
अथवा
भुगतान शेष में असंतुलन का कारण लिखिए?
उत्तर:
भुगतान संतुलन का अर्थ:
भुगतान संतुलन से आशय, किसी देश – विशेष की वस्तुओं के आयातों एवं निर्यातों तथा उनके मूल्यों के संपूर्ण विवरण से होता है। सामान्यतः विभिन्न देशों के बीच विभिन्न वस्तुओं के आयात – निर्यात के अतिरिक्त अन्य प्रकार के भी लेन – देन होते हैं, जैसे – बीमा, जहाजी किराया, बैंकों का शुल्क, ब्याज, लाभ, पूँजी का स्थानांतरण सेवाओं का पुरस्कार इत्यादि। भारत में भुगतान संतुलन की प्रतिकूलता के कारण-भारत में भुगतान संतुलन के प्रतिकूल होने के तीन कारण निम्नलिखित हैं –

1. पेट्रोलियम पदार्थों के आयात में वृद्धि:
तेल उत्पादक देश अपने पेट्रोलियम पदार्थों के मल्य प्रतिवर्ष बढ़ाते रहते हैं। साथ – ही – साथ देश में पेट्रोलियम पदार्थों की खपत बढ़ी है जिससे भारी मात्रा में इनका आयात किया गया है।

2. आशा के अनुरूप निर्यातों में वृद्धि न होना:
भारत में भुगतान संतुलन के प्रतिकूल होने का एक कारण निर्यातों का आशानुरूप न बढ़ना है।

3. बढ़ती हुई जनसंख्या:
भारत की जनसंख्या वृद्धि के कारण आयातों में वृद्धि हुई है। तथा घरेलू उपभोग के बढ़ जाने के कारण निर्यातों में कमी आई है जिससे भारत की भुगतान संतुलन में प्रतिकूलता आई है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 4.
भारत में भुगतान संतुलन को सुधारने हेतु चार उपाय बताइए?
उत्तर:
भारत में भुगतान संतुलन को सुधारने के उपाय इस प्रकार हैं –

1. निर्यात को प्रोत्साहन:
सरकार को निर्यात को प्रोत्साहित करना चाहिए, ताकि निर्यात बढ़ सके इसके लिए –

  1. निर्यात करों में कमी की जानी चाहिए
  2. देश में उद्योगों को आर्थिक सहायता दी जानी चाहिए
  3. विदेशों में वस्तुओं के लिए प्रचार व विज्ञापन किया जाना चाहिए।

2. आयात में कमी:
भारत को अपने आयात में कमी लानी चाहिए। इसके लिए आयात करों में वृद्धि की जानी चाहिए)जिससे आयातिक वस्तु महँगी हो जाए और माँग में कमी आए।

3. विदेशी ऋणों का प्रयोग:
भुगतान संतुलन की प्रतिकूलता को दूर करने के लिए विदेशी ऋणों का भी प्रयोग किया जा सकता है)। वास्तव में यह कुछ समय के लिए इस समस्या का समाधान तो कर देता है लेकिन बाद में भुगतानों को अदा करते समय कठिनाई होती है।

4. विनिमय नियंत्रण:
भुगतान संतुलन को ठीक करने के लिए विनिमय नियंत्रण भी एक अच्छा मार्ग है। इससे आयात घटते हैं एवं निर्यात बढ़ते हैं।

प्रश्न 5.
स्थिर विनिमय – दर के पक्ष – विपक्ष में दो – दो तर्क दीजिए?
उत्तर:
स्थिर विनिमय दर से आशय:
जब विनिमय – दर का निर्धारण सरकार के द्वारा किया जाता है तो उसे स्थिर विनिमय दर कहते हैं।

स्थिर विनिमय – दर के पक्ष में तर्क:
स्थिर विनिमय – दर के पक्ष में निम्नांकित तर्क दिये जा सकते हैं –

1. अंतर्राष्ट्रीय व्यापार को प्रोत्साहन:
स्थिर विनिमयदर के अंतर्गत आयातकर्ता एवं निर्यातकर्ता को इस बात की जानकारी रहती है कि कितना भुगतान करना है तथा कितना भुगतान प्राप्त होगा।

2. विनिमय व्यवस्था:
यदि देश में विनिमय – दर स्थिर है तो सट्टेबाजी जैसी प्रवृत्तियों को प्रोत्साहन नहीं मिलता है तथा सरकार विनिमय नियंत्रण तथा प्रबंध व्यवस्थाओं से मुक्त हो जाती है।

3. निर्यातक देशों के लिए आवश्यक जिन देशों को राष्ट्रीय आय का अधिकांश भाग निर्यातों से ही प्राप्त होता है उनके लिये विनिमय दर में स्थायित्व अत्यधिक आवश्यक है।

4. पूँजी निर्माण:
विदेशी विनिमय दर में स्थिरता के फलस्वरूप देश में आंतरिक कीमत स्तर पर भी अनुकूल प्रभाव पड़ता है। पूँजी निर्माण की दर बढ़ती है तथा देश का आर्थिक विकास होता है।

स्थिर विनिमय – दर के विपक्ष में तर्क:
स्थिर विनिमय – दर के विपक्ष में निम्नांकित तर्क दिए जाते हैं –

1. आर्थिक विकास पर प्रतिकूल प्रभाव:
स्थिर विनिमय – दर का प्राथमिक उद्देश्य इसमें स्थिरता को बनाये रखना होता है और राष्ट्रीय आय, रोजगार नीति, मूल्य – स्तर जैसे राष्ट्रीय उद्देश्यों को गौण मान लिया जाता है।

2. भ्रष्टाचार:
स्थिर विनिमय – दर को बनाये रखने के लिए देश में अनेक नियंत्रण लगाये जाते हैं। नियंत्रण अधिक होने पर भ्रष्टाचार फैलने के अवसर बढ़ जाते हैं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 6.
व्यापार संतुलन एवं भुगतान संतुलन में अन्तर स्पष्ट कीजिए?
उत्तर:
व्यापार संतुलन एवं भुगतान संतुलन में अन्तर –

व्यापार संतुलन

  1. व्यापार संतुलन में आयात – निर्यात की जाने वाली दृश्य मदों को ही शामिल किया जाता है।
  2. व्यापार संतुलन, भुगतान संतुलन का एक भाग है।
  3. किसी देश का व्यापार संतुलन पक्ष में न होना कोई अधिक चिन्ता का विषय नहीं है।
  4. व्यापार संतुलन अनुकूल या प्रतिकूल हो सकता है।
  5. व्यापार की दृष्टि से व्यापार संतुलन का महत्व कम होता है।

भुगतान संतुलन:

  1. भुगतान संतुलन में दृश्य मदों के साथ – साथ अदृश्य मदों को ही शामिल किया जाता है।
  2. भुगतान संतुलन की धारणा अधिक व्यापक होती है।
  3. यदि भुगतान संतुलन पक्ष में नहीं है तो यह चिन्ता का विषय है।
  4. भुगतान संतुलन सदा ही संतुलित रहता है।
  5. भुगतान संतुलन का महत्व अधिक होता है।

प्रश्न 7.
अवमूल्यन और मूल्यह्रास में अंतर स्पष्ट कीजिए?
उत्तर:
अधिकीलित विनिमय प्रणाली में जब सरकार के द्वारा विनिमय दर में वृद्धि की जाती है तो इसे मुद्रा का अवमूल्यन कहा जाता है। अवमूल्यन तब होता है जब देश स्थिर विनिमय दर प्रणाली को ग्रहण करता है। दूसरी ओर, बाजार माँग एवं पूर्ति शक्तियों के प्रभाव से बिना किसी सरकारी हस्तक्षेप के देश की मुद्रा का मूल्य कम हो जाता है तो इसे मूल्यह्रास कहते हैं, मूल्यह्रास तब होता है जब देश नम्य विनिमय दर प्रणाली अथवा तिरती विनियम दर प्रणाली को ग्रहण करता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 8.
जब M = 60 + 0.06 Y हो, तो आयात की सीमांत प्रवृत्ति क्या होगी? आयात की सीमांत प्रवृत्ति और समस्त माँग फलन में क्या संबंध है?
उत्तर:
दिया है,
M = 60 + 0. 60 Y
∵ M = \(\bar { M } \) + mY
∴ m = 0.06
\(\bar { M } \) > 0 स्वायत्त घटक है। 0 < m < 1
यहाँ m आयात की सीमांत प्रवृत्ति है। सीमांत प्रवृत्ति का मान 1 से कम तथा शून्य से अधिक होता है। आय का एक अतिरिक्त रुपया आयात खर्च करने से प्राप्त अनुपात है। यह सीमांत प्रवृत्ति के सादृश्य होता है। आयात की सीमांत प्रवृत्ति और समस्त माँग में धनात्मक संबंध पाया जाता है।

प्रश्न 9.
व्याख्या कीजिए कि – G – T = (Sg – I) – (X – M)?
उत्तर:
G – T = (Sg – I) – (X – M)
यहाँ, G = सरकारी व्यय, T = कर, G – T = निवल सरकारी व्यय, Sg = सरकार की बचत, I = निवेश, Sg – I = निवल बचतें, x = निर्यात, M= आयात, X – M = व्यापार संतुलन। यह दिया गया समीकरण सही है, चूँकि यह स्पष्ट करता है कि निवल सरकारी व्यय, निवल सरकारी बचतों और व्यापार संतुलन के समान है।

प्रश्न 10.
क्या चालू पूँजीगत घाटा खतरे का संकेत होगा? व्याख्या कीजिए?
उत्तर:
चालू पूँजीगत घाटा खतरे का संकेत होगा या नहीं। इस संदर्भ में तर्क दिया जाता है कि जब किसी देश में चालू पूँजीगत घाटा होता है तो बचत कम हो रही होती है, निवेश बढ़ोत्तरी हो रही होती है अथवा बजट घाटे में वृद्धि हो रही होती है। देश के दीर्घकालीन परिप्रेक्ष्य के बारे में चिन्ता का कारण तब होता है जब चालू पूँजीगत घाटे से बचत कम होती है और बजटीय घाटा अधिक होता है। घाटे से उच्च निजी उपभोग अथवा सरकारी उपभोग प्रतिबिंबित होता है।

इन स्थितियों में देश के पूँजी स्टॉक में तेजी से वृद्धि नहीं होगी जिससे पर्याप्त संवृद्धि हो सके और ऋण अदायगी की जा सके। परंतु यदि चालू पूँजीगत घाटे से निवेश में वृद्धि प्रतिबिंबित हो तो चिन्ता का कोई कारण नहीं होता है क्योंकि इससे पूँजी स्टॉक का अधिक तीव्रता से निर्माण होगा और भविष्य में निर्गत में वृद्धि होगी। अतः संक्षेप में हम यह कह सकते हैं कि यदि किसी देश में ऋण की नई निधि से ब्याज दर की अपेक्षा विकास दर अधिक होती है तो चालू पूँजीगत घाटे से किसी प्रकार के खतरे का संकेत नहीं होता।

प्रश्न 11.
संतुलित व्यापार शेष और चालू खाता संतुलन में अंतर स्पष्ट कीजिए?
उत्तर:
संतुलित व्यापार शेष:

  1. आयात एवं निर्यात के संतुलन को संतुलित व्यापार व्यापार शेष कहा जाता है।
  2. यह एक संकुचित धारणा है।
  3. इमसें केवल भौतिक वस्तुओं के आयात निर्यात को ही शामिल किया जाता है।

चालू खाता संतुलन:

  1. व्यापार शेष, सेवाओं के आयात व निर्यात शेष तथा हस्तांतरण भुगतान शेष के योग को चालू खाता संतुलन कहते हैं।
  2. यह एक संकुचित धारणा है।
  3. भौतिक वस्तुओं के निर्यात – आयात के साथ – साथ सेवाओं व हस्तांतरण भुगतान के लेन – देन को भी इसमें शामिल किया जाता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 12.
यदि देश B से देश A में मुदा स्फीति ऊँची हो और दोनों देशों में विनिमय दर स्थिर हो, तो दोनों देशों के व्यापार शेष का क्या होगा?
उत्तर:
यदि देश ‘B’ से देश ‘A’ में मुद्रा स्फीति की दर ऊँची हो और दोनों देशों में विनिमय दर स्थिर हो, तो देश ‘A’ में व्यापार शेष घाटा होगा और देश B में व्यापार शेष आधिक्य होगा। ऐसी स्थिति में देश B से देश A को वस्तुओं का आयात करना लाभप्रद होगा। परिणामस्वरूप देश A अधिक वस्तुओं का अधिक मात्रा में आयात करेगा और देश B को कम मात्रा में वस्तुओं का निर्यात करेगा।अत: देश A के सामने व्यापार शेष घाटे की समस्या उत्पन्न होगी। दूसरी ओर देश B देश A से कम मात्रा में वस्तुओं का आयात करेगा। अतः देश B का व्यापार शेष धनात्मक होगा।

भुगतान संतुलन दीर्घ उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
भुगतान संतुलन की मदों का उल्लेख कीजिए?
उत्तर:
किसी देश का भुगतान संतुलन उसके समस्त विदेशी लेन – देन तथा लेनदारियों – देनदारियों का विवरण होता है। इसके बाँयी ओर सभी लेनदारियाँ तथा दाँयी ओर देनदारियाँ प्रदर्शित की जाती हैं बाँयी ओर की मदों एवं दाँयी ओर के मदों के अंदर के स्वरूप से भुगतान संतुलन का स्वरूप स्पष्ट हो जाता है। भुगतान संतुलन के विवरण में सम्मिलित विभिन्न मदों का वर्गीकरण लीग ऑफ नेशन्स ने दो मुख्य शीर्षकों के अंतर्गत किया था और अधिकांश देश इसी आधार पर भुगतान संतुलन का विवरण तैयार करते हैं। भुगतान संतुलन का प्रथम शीर्षक चालू खाता होता है और दूसरा शीर्षक पूँजी खाता होता है।

  1. चालू खाता: चालू खाते में दृश्य और अदृश्य मदें सम्मिलित होती हैं।
  2. पूँजी खाता: इसमें विदेशी पूँजी के विनियोग तथा ऋण की राशियों को दिखाया जाता है।

प्रश्न 2.
पूँजी खाते में शामिल मदों को बताइए?
उत्तर:
पूँजी खाते में शामिल प्रमुख मदें निम्नलिखित हैं –

  1. बैंकिंग पूँजी का प्रवाह: बैंकिंग पूँजी का अंतरप्रवाह देश के लिए प्राप्ति पक्ष तथा बाह्य प्रवाह भुगतान पक्ष में गिना जाता है, लेकिन बैंकिंग पूँजी में केन्द्रीय बैंक को शामिल नहीं किया जाता हैं।
  2. निजी ऋण: देश के निजी क्षेत्र द्वारा विदेशों से प्राप्त ऋण, भुगतान संतुलन खाते के लेनदारी पक्ष तथा उनके ऋण भुगतानों को लेनदारी पक्ष में गिना जाता है।
  3. विदेशी निवेश: विदेशी निवेश में दो प्रकार के निवेश आते हैं –
    • प्रत्यक्ष विदेशी निवेश:
    • प्रत्यक्ष विदेशी निवेश से तात्पर्य विदेशों में परिसम्पत्तियाँ खरीदना है तथा उन पर नियंत्रण रखना है।
    • पोर्टफोलियो निवेश:
  4. इस निवेश में विदेशों में परिसम्पत्तियाँ खरीदी जाती हैं परन्तु उस पर नियंत्रण नहीं होता है।
  5. सरकारी पूँजी का लेन – देन:

इसमें निम्नलिखित मदें शामिल हैं –

  1. ऋण
  2. ऋणों का भुगतान
  3. मिश्रित
  4. कोष एवं मौद्रिक सोना।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 3.
विदेशी विनिमय – दर को प्रभावित करने वाले तत्वों को लिखिए?(कोई चार)
अथवा
विदेशी विनिमय – दर के उतार – चढ़ाव के पाँच कारण समझाइए?
उत्तर:
विदेशी विनिमय – दर को प्रभावित करने वाले प्रमुख तत्व निम्न हैं –

1. आयात एवं निर्यात में परिवर्तन:
यदि देश के निर्यात, आयात से अधिक हैं तो देश की मुद्रा की माँग बढ़ेगी और विदेशी विनिमय:
दर देश के पक्ष में होगा इसके विपरीत देश में आयात, निर्यात की तुलना में अधिक है तो विदेशी मुद्रा की माँग बढ़ेगी और विदेशी विनिमय दर देश के विपक्ष में होगा या प्रतिकूल होगा।

2. बैंकिंग संबंधी प्रभाव:
यदि व्यापारिक बैंक विदेशी बैंक पर बड़ी मात्रा में बैंकर्स ड्रॉफ्ट तथा अन्य प्रकार के साख-पत्र जारी करता है, तो इससे विदेशी विनिमय की मांग बढ़ जायेगी इसके विपरीत अगर विदेशी बैंक देश के बैंकों पर साख – पत्र जारी करती है तो देशी मुद्रा की मांग बढ़ेगी और विनिमय-दर देश के पक्ष में हो जाती है।

3. कीमतों में परिवर्तन:
दो देशों में किसी एक देश में सापेक्षिक दृष्टि से कीमत के परिवर्तन के परिणामस्वरूप विनिमय-दर परिवर्तित हो जाती है। जैसे – भारत में कीमत बढ़ जाती है, जबकि जर्मनी में कीमत में परिवर्तन नहीं होता है। अतः जर्मनी को भारत की वस्तुएँ महँगी पड़ने लगेंगी और वे यहाँ से कम वस्तुएँ मँगायेंगे। इसके विपरीत भारत को जर्मनी की वस्तुएँ सस्ती पड़ेंगी और वहाँ से आयात करने लगेंगी।

4. पूँजी का आगमन:
जिस देश में विदेशी पूँजी आती है उस देश की मुद्रा की मांग बढ़ जाती है। परिणामस्वरूप विदेशी विनिमय दर उस देश के पक्ष में हो जाती है। इसके विपरीत पूँजी देश से विदेश में जाती है तो विदेशी मुद्रा की माँग बढ़ जाती है। जिससे विनिमय दर देश के विपक्ष में हो जाती है।

प्रश्न 4
दृश्य आयात – निर्यात तथा अदृश्य आयात – निर्यात को समझाइये?
उत्तर:
दृश्य आयात – निर्यात:
दृश्य आयात – निर्यात के अंतर्गत उन वस्तुओं के आयात – निर्यात को शामिल किया जाता है जिनका बंदरगाह में रखे गये रजिस्टर में लेखा – जोखा रखा जाता है। इसे देखकर वर्षभर में किए गए आयातों एवं निर्यातों के मूल्य प्राप्त किये जा सकते हैं। इसलिए इसे दृश्य मदें कहा जाता है। इसमें केवल वस्तुओं के आयात – निर्यात को ही शामिल किया जाता है।

अदृश्य आयात – निर्यात:
अदृश्य आयात – निर्यात के अंतर्गत सेवाओं के आदान – प्रदान को शामिल किया जाता है। ये सेवाएँ हैं – बैंकिंग, बीमा, शिपिंग आदि जिनका बंदरगाहों पर लेखा – जोखा नहीं रखा जाता है। इस प्रकार अदृश्य मदों में सेवाओं एवं पूँजी के आयात – निर्यात को शामिल किया जाता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 5.
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय – दर किसे कहते हैं? इसके पक्ष – विपक्ष में दो – दो तर्क दीजिए?
उत्तर:
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय – दर का अर्थ:
जब विनिमय दर का निर्धारण विदेशी मुद्रा बाजार में करेंसियों की माँग एवं पूर्ति के द्वारा निर्धारित किया जाता है तो उसे लोचपूर्ण विनिमय – दर कहते हैं।

लोचपूर्ण विनिमय – दर के पक्ष में तर्क:
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर के पक्ष में निम्नलिखित तर्क दिये जाते हैं –

1. भुगतान संतुलन में साम्य:
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर की दशा में अन्य राष्ट्रीय हितों, जैसे-राष्ट्रीय आय, मूल्य स्तर आदि की उपेक्षा किये बिना भुगतान-संतुलन में साम्य स्थापित करना संभव होता है।

2. अधिमूल्यन एवं अवमूल्यन:
लोचपूर्ण विनिमय दर होने पर अपने देश की मुद्रा को विदेशी मुद्रा की तुलना में आसानी से बढ़ाया या घटाया जा सकता है। इससे अर्थव्यवस्था में साम्य बनाये रखना संभव होता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 6.
मान लीजिए C = 100 + 0.75 YD, I = 500, G = 750, कर आय का 20 प्रतिशत है, x = 150, M = 100 + 0.2Y तो संतुलन आय, बजट घाटा अथवा आधिक्य और व्यापार घाटा अथवा आधिक्य की गणना कीजिए?
उत्तर:
C = 100 + 0.75 YD जहाँ C = 100, C = 0.75, I = 500, G = 750, X = 150, M = 100 + 0.2Y
कर आय (t) = 20%
आय
(Y) = C + C (1 – 1) Y + l + G + (X – M)
Y = 100 + 0.75 (1 – 0.2) Y + 500 +750 + (150 – 100 – 0 – 2Y)
Y = 100 + 0.75(0.8) Y+ 500 + 750 + 150 – 100 – 0 – 2Y
Y = 100 + 0.6 Y + 1300 – 0.2 Y = 1400 + 0.4 Y
Y – 0.4 Y = 1400
0.6 Y = 1400
Y = \(\frac{1400}{0.6}\)
= 2333
बजट घाटा = सरकारी व्यय कर (G) – कर
= 750 – 2333 का 20% = 750 – 467 = 283
M = 100 + 0.2 Y = 100 + 0.2(2333)
= 100 + 467 = 567
व्यापार घाटा = M – X = 567 – 150 = 417.

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines

Amines NCERT Intext Exercises

Question 1.
Classify the following amines as primary, secondary or tertiary:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 1
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 1-1
(iii) (C2H5)2CHNH2
(iv) (C2H5)2NH.
Answer:
(i) Primary
(ii) Tertiary
(iii) Primary
(iv) Secondary

Question 2.
(i) Write structures of different isomeric amines corresponding to the molecular formula, C4H11N.
(ii) Write IUPAC names of all the isomers.
(iii) What type of isomerism is exhibited by different pairs of amines ?
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 2

Isomerism:
(i)-(iv) and (vi)-(vii) are Position isomers, (v)-(vi) and (v)-(vii) are Metamers, (i)-(ii), (iii)-(iv) and (i)-(iii) are Chain isomers.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
How will you convert:
(i) Benzene into aniline,
(ii) Benzene into N, N-dimethylaniline,
(iii) Cl – (CH2)4 – Cl into hexane -1, 6 – diamine.
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 3

Question 4.
Arrange the following in increasing order of their basic strength:

  1. C2H5NH2, C62H5NH2,NH3, C6H5CH2NH2 and (C2H5)2NH
  2. C2H5NH2, (C2H2)2NH, (C2H5)3N, C6H5NH2
  3. CH3NH2, (CH3 )2NH, (CH3 )3N, C6H5NH2 , C6H5CH2NH2.

Answer:

  1. C6H5NH2 < NH3 < C6H5CH2NH2 < C2H5NH2 < (C2H5)2NH
  2. C6H5NH2 < C2H5NH2 < (C2H5)3N < (C2H5)2NH 
  3. C6H5NH2 < C6H5CH2NH2 < (CH3)2N < CH3NH2 < (CH3)2NH

Question 5.
Complete the following acid-base reactions and name the products :
(i) CH3CH2CH2NH2 + HCl → ?
(ii) (C2HCl)3N + HCl → ?
Ans.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 4

Question 6.
Write reactions of the final alkylation product of aniline with excess of methyl iodide in the presence of sodium carbonate solution.
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 5

Question 7.
Write the chemical reaction of aniline with benzoyl chloride and write the name of the product obtained.
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 6

Question 8.
Write structures of different isomers corresponding to the molecular formula, C3H9N. Write IUPAC names of the isomers which will liberate nitrogen gas on treatment with nitrous acid.
Answer:
(a) C3H9N has four structural isomers.
These are:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 7

Question 9.
Convert:
(i) 3-Methylaniline into 3 – nitrotoIuene
(ii) Aniline into 1,3, 5 – tribromobenzene
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 8

Amines NCERT Text Book Exercises

Question 1.
Write IUPAC names of the following compounds and classify them into primary, secondary, and tertiary amines:

  1. (CH3)2CHNH3
  2. CH3 (CH2 )2 NH 2
  3. CH3NHCH(CH3)2
  4. (CH3)3CNH2
  5. C6H5NHCH3
  6. (CH3CH2)3NCH3
  7. m – BrC6H4NH3.

Answer:

  1. Propan – 2 – amine (1°)
  2. Propan – 1 – amine (1 °)
  3. N – Methylpropan – 2 – amine (2°)
  4. 2 – MethyIpropan – 2 – amine (3°)
  5. N – Methylbenzenamine or A’-Methylaniline (2°)
  6. N – Ethyl – A – Methylethanamine (3°)
  7. 3 – Bromobenzenamine or 3-Bromoaniline (1°).

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Give one chemical test to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:

  1. Methylamine and dimethylamine,
  2. Secondary and tertiary amines,
  3. Ethylamine and aniline
  4. Aniline and benzylamine
  5. Aniline and N- methylaniline.

Answer:
(i) By Carbylamine test:
Methylamine is a primary amine, therefore, it gives carbylamine test. In contrast, diethylamine is a secondary amine and hence does not give this test.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 9

(ii) By Libermann Nitrosoamine test:
2° Amines on treatment with HNO2(generates in situ by the action of HCl on NaNO2) give yellow coloured oily N-nitrosoamine. For Example
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 10

N-Nitrosodiethylamine on warming with phenol and cone. H2SO2 gives a green solu-tion which when made alkaline with aqueous NaOH turns deep blue and then red on dilu-tion. Tertiary amines do not give this test.

(iii) Azodye test:
It involves the reaction of any aromatic primary amine with HNO2 (NaNO2 + dil. HCl) at 273 – 278 K followed by treatment with an alkaline solution of ( β – naphthol) when a brilliant yellow, orange or red coloured dye is obtained
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 11
Aliphate primary amines under these conditions give a brisk evolution of N2 gas with the formation of priamary alcohols i.e. the solution remains clear.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-12
(iv) Aniline gives dye test (see, iii):
Benzyl amine reacts with nitrous acid to form benzyl alcohol and nitrogen gas (seen as bubbles).
C6H5CH2NH2 + NaOH → C6H5CH2OH + N2+ H2O

(v) These can be distinguished by carbylamine test:
Aniline being primary amines gives carbylamine test i.e. when heated with an alcoholic solution of KOH and CHCl2, it gives foul smell of phenylisocyanide.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 13

Methylaniline forms nitrosoamine (yellow oily liquid) on treatment with nitrous acid, which is stable at room temperature. However, on reaction with HCl in ether and alcohol, the nitroso (- NO) group migrates to para position.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 14

Question 3.
Account for the following:

  1. pKb of aniline is more than that of methylamine.
  2. Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is not.
  3. Methylamine in water reacts with ferric chloride to precipitate hydrated ferric oxide.
  4. Although amino group is O – and p – directing in aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions, aniline on nitration gives a substantial amount of m-nitroaniline.
  5. Aniline does not undergo Friedel- Crafts reaction.
  6. Diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic amines.
  7. Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred for synthesizing primary amines.

Answer:

(i) In aniline, the lone pair electrons on the N-atoms are delocalized over the benzene ring thereby decreasing the electron density on the N – atom. In contrast, in CH3NH2, + 1 effect of CH3 increases the electron density on the N-atom. Therefore, aniline is a weaker base than methylamine and hence its pKb value is higher than that of methylamine.

(ii) Ethylamine dissolves in water due to inter molecular H-bonding. In aniline, due to the large hydrophobic part, i.e. hydrocarbon part, the extent of H – bonding decreases considerably and hence, aniline is insoluble in water.

(iii) Methylamine being more basic than water, accepts a proton from water liberating OH ions,
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 15
These OH ions combine with Fe+3 ions present in H2O to form brown ppt. of hydrated ferric oxide.
FeCl3 → Fe+3+ 3Cl
2Fe+3+ 6OH→ 2Fe(OH)3 or Fe2O3.3H2O
Hydrates ferric oxide (Brown ppt.)

(iv) In strongly acidic medium (cone. HNO3/conc. H2SO4), most of the aniline gets protonated to form anilinium ion \(\left(\stackrel{\ominus}{\mathrm{N}} \mathrm{H}_{3}\right)\) which is m – directing and deactivating while – NH2 group in aniline is o, p – directing and activating. That is why besides the o, p – deriva- tives, significant amount of meta derivative is also formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 16

(v) Aniline being a Lewis base reacts with Lewis acid AlCl3 to form a salt.
C6H5NH2+AlCl3 → C6H5 N H2 AlCl3
Lewis base    Lewis acid

Consequently, N of aniline acquires positive charge and thus acts a strong deactivating group for electrophilic substitution reaction. As a result, aniline does not undergo Friedel – Crafts reaction.

(vi) The diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic amines due to delocalization of the positive charge on the benzene ring.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 17

(vii) Gabriel phthalimide reaction gives pure 1° amines without any contamination of 2° and 3° amines. Therefore, it is preferred for synthesizing 1° amines.

Question 4.
Arrange the following:
(i) In decreasing order of the pKb values:
C6H5NH2, C6H5NHCH3, (C2H5)2NH and C6H5NH2

(ii) In increasing order of basic strength:
C6H5NH2, C6H5N(CH3)2 ,(C2H5)2NH and CH3NH2

(iii) In increasing order of basic strength:
(a) Aniline, p-nitroaniline and p – toluidine
(b) C6H5NH2, C6H5NHCH3, C6H5CH2NH2

(iv) In decreasing order of basic strength in gas phase:
C2H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, (C2H5)3N and NH3

(v) In increasing order of boiling point:
C6H5OH, (CH3)2NH, C2H5NH2

(vi) In increasing order of solubility in water:
C6H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, C2H5NH2.

Answer:
(i) Due to delocalization of lone pair of electrons of the N-atom over the benzene ring, C6H5NH2 and C6H5NHCH3 are for less basic than C2H5NH2 and (C2H5)2 NH. Further, due to + I effect of the CH3 group, C6H5NHCH3 is slightly more basic than C6H5NH2.

Among C2H5NH2 and (C2H5)2NH, (C2H5)2NH is more basic than C2H5NH2 due to greater + 1 effect of the two C2H5groups. Combining all these facts, the relative basic strength of these four amines decreases in the order.(C2H2)2NH > C2H2NH2 > C6H5NHCH2> C2H5NH2

Since, a stronger base has lower pKb value, therefore pKb values decreases in the reverse order:
C6H5 NH2 > C6H5NHCH3 > C2H5NH2 > (C2H2)2NH

(ii) As explained in –
Answer:
(a) the relative basic strength of the amines decreases in the order:
(C2H5)2NH > C6H5NHCH3 > C6H5NH2

Among CH3NH2 and (C2H5)2NH, due to the greater + I effect of the two C2H5 groups, (C2H5)2 is more basic than CH3NH2. Thus, the basic strength of the four amines decreases in the order: (C2H5)2NH > CH3NH2> C6H5NHCH3 > C6H5NH2

(iii) (a) The electron-donating groups increases the basic strength of amines while the electron-withdrawing groups decreases the basic strength. Therefore, basicity increases in the order:
p-nitroaniline < aniline < p – toludine.

(b) In C6H5NH2 and C6H5NHCH3, N is directly attached to the benzene ring and thus the lone pair of electrons on the N-atom is delocalized over the benzene ring. Therefore, both C6H5NH2 and C6H5NHCH3 are weaker bases than C6H5C H2NH2. Furthers due to + I effect of CH3 group. C6H5NHCH3 is a stronger base than C6H5NH2.

The basic strength increases in the order:
C6H5NH2 < C6H5NHCH3 < C6H5CH2NH2

(iv) Solvent effects, i.e. stabilization of the conjugate acids due to H-bonding are absent in the gas phase. In the gas phase, basic strength mainly depends upon the + I effect of the alkyl groups. Thus, basic strength in the gas phase decreases in the order:
(C6H5)3N > (C2H5)2NH > C2H5NH2> NH3

(v) Since, the electronegativity of ‘O’ is higher than that of N, alcohols form stronger H-bonds than amines. Further, the extent of H-bonding depends upon the number of H – atoms on the N-atoms. Thus, the inter molecular forces are in the order C2H5 – OH > C5H5NH2 > (CH3)2NH. Therefore, the b.pts of the given three compounds increases in the order:
(CH3)2NH < C2H5NH2 < C2H5OH

(vi) Solubility decreases with:
(a) Increase in molecular mass of amines due to increase in the size of the hydrophobic hydrocarbon part, and.
(b) Decrease in the number of H – atoms on the N-atom which undergo H-bonding.

Among the given compounds, C6H5NH2has the highest molecular mass of 93 followed by (C2H5)5NH with molecular mass of 73 while C2H5NH2 has the lowest molecular mass of 45. Thus, the solubility increases in the order in which molecular mass decreases i.e.,
C6H5NH2 < (C2H5)2NH < C2H5NH2

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
How will you convert:

  1. Ethanoic acid into methanamine
  2. Hexanenitrile into 1 – aminopentane
  3. Methanol to ethanoic acid
  4. Ethanamine into methanamine
  5. Ethanoic acid into propanoic acid
  6. Methanamine into ethanamine
  7. Nitromethane into dimethylamine
  8. Propanoic acid into ethanoic acid.

Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 18

Question 6.
Describe a method for the identification of primary, secondary and tertiary amines. Also write chemical equations of the reactions involved.
Answer:
Heinsberg’s test:
This is a excellent test for distinguishing between primary, secondary and tertiary amines. The amine is treated with benzene sulphonyl chloride (Hinsberg’s reagent) in presence of excess of aqueous potassium hydroxide solution. (Refer text for details)

Question 7.
Write short notes on the following:

  1. Carbylamine reaction
  2. Diazotisation
  3. Hofmann’s bromamide reaction
  4. Coupling reaction,
  5. Ammonolysis
  6. Acetylation
  7. Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.

Answer:

(i) Carbylamine reaction:
Primary aliphatic amine or aniline, when warmed with chloroform in presence of alcoholic KOH, gives iso cyanide or carbylamine, a compound with disagreeable odour. This reaction is known as Carbylamine reaction.
C6H5NH2 (aniline)+ CHCl3 + 3KOH → C6H5N \(\overrightarrow{=}\) C + 3KCl + H2O aniline phenyl isocyanide

(ii) Diazotisation:
By action of NaNO2 solution in ice cooled solution of aromatic amine formed inorganic acid, diazonium salts are obtained.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 22

Diazonium salt contains diazo group (- N \(=\) N-) therefore, this process is called diazotization.

(iii) Hofmann’s bromamide reaction:
Primary aliphatic and aromatic amines can be prepared from amides by treatment with Br2 and KOH. The amine formed contains one carbon atom less than the parent amide. Therefore, this method is used for stepping down the series in organic conversion. Due to this reason it is also known as Hofmann degradation.
RCONH2 (Alkanamide ) + Br2 + 3NaOH > RNH2 (Alkanamine)+ 2NaBr+NaHCO3 + H2O
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 23

(iv) Coupling reaction:
Aniline reacts with diazonium chloride at ice cold temperature to give bright orange-red dye.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 24

(v) Ammonoiysis:
It is a process of replacement of either halogen atom in alkyl halids (or aryl halides) or hydroxyl group in alcohols (or phenols) by amino group. The reagent used for ammonoiysis is alcoholic ammonia. Generally, a mixture of primary, secondary and tertiary Amine is fromed
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 25

(vi) Acetylation:
Aliphatic and aromatic primary and secondary amines react with acid chlorides, anhydrides and esters by nucleophilic substitution reaction. This reaction is amine is formed. considered as replacement of hydrogen atom of — NH2 or >NH group by acyl group. This reaction is known as acylation.

The reaction is carried out in the presence of a base stronger than amine like pyridine, which removes HCl so formed and shift the equilibrium towards right hand side. The product obtained by acylation reaction is known as amides.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 26

(vii) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis:
In this reaction, potassium phthalimide react with alkyl halide to form N-methyl phthalimide which on hydrolysis give primary amine
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 27

Question 8.
Accomplish the following conversions:

  1. Nitrobenzene to benzoic acid
  2. Benzene to m – bromophenol
  3. Benzoic acid to aniline
  4. Aniline to 2,4,6 – tribromofluorobenzene
  5. Benzyl chloride to 2 – phenylethanamine
  6. Chlorobenzene to p – chloroaniline
  7. Aniline to p – bromoaniline
  8. Benzamide to toluene
  9. Aniline to benzyl alcohol.

Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 28

Question 9.
Give the structures of A, B and C in the following reactions:

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 29
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-10

Question 10.
An aromatic compound ‘A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating forms compound ‘B’ which on heating with Br2 and KOH forms a compound ‘C’ of molecular formula C6H7N. Write the structures and IUPAC names of compounds A, B and C.
Answer:
Structures of compounds ‘B’ and ‘C’:
(i) Since, ‘C’ is formed from ‘B’ on treatment with Br2 + KOH (i.e., Hofmann bromamide reaction), ‘B’ must be an amide and ‘C’ must be an amine. The only amine having the molecular formula C6H5NH2 benzene amine or aniline).

(ii) Since, ‘C’ is aniline, the amide from which it is formed must be benzamide (C6H5CONH2). Thus, compound ‘B’ is benzamide. The chemical equation showing the conversion of‘B’ to ‘C’ is,

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 29-4
Structure of compound ‘A’:
Since, ‘A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating forms benzamide ‘A’ must be benzoic acid.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 29-5

Question 11.
Complete the following reactions:

(i) C6H5NH2 + CHCl3 + (afc.)KOH →
(ii) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2+H2O →
(iii) C6H5NH2+H2SO4(Conc.) →
(iv) C6H5N2C1 + C2H5OH →
(v) C6H5NH2 + Br2 →
(vi) C6H5NH2+ (CH3CO)2O →
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-1

Question 12.
Why cannot aromatic primary amines be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis ?
Answer:
In this reaction, potassium phthalimide gives phthalimide anion which acts as a nucleophile and attacks electrophilic carbon of alkyl halide.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-4

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-5

But due to much less reactivity of aryl halide (nucleophilic substitution reaction), 1° aromatic amines can’t be prepared.

Question 13.
Write the reactions of:

  1. Aromatic
  2. Aliphatic primary amines with nitrous acid.

Answer:
(i) Aromatic primary amines react HNO2 at 273 – 278 K to form aromatic diazonium salts.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-6

(ii) Aliphatic primary amines also react with HNO2 at 273-278 K to form aliphatic diazonium salt. But these are unstable even at this low temperature and thus decompose readily to form a mixture of compounds consisting of alkyl chlorides, alkenes, and alcohols, out of which alcohols generally predominate.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-7

Question 14.
Give a plausible explanation for each of the following:

  1. Why are amines less acidic than alcohols of comparable molecular masses?
  2. Why do primary amines have a higher boiling point than tertiary amines?
  3. Why are aliphatic amines stronger bases than aromatic amines?

Answer:
(i) Amines lose a proton to form an amide ion while alcohol lose a proton to give an alkoxide ion.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-8

Since ‘O’ is more electronegative than N, RO can accommodate the -ve charge more easily than the RNH ion. In
other words, RO- is more stable than RNH Thus, alcohols are more acidic than amines or amines are less acidic than alcohols.

(ii) Primary amines (R—NH2) have two hydrogen atoms on the N atom and so, they undergo extensive intermolecular H-bonding.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 30-9

Tertiary amines (R3N) do not have hydrogen atoms on the N-atom and therefore, they do not undergo H-bonding. As a result, primary amines have a higher boiling point than tertiary amines of comparable molecular mass. For example, the Boiling point of H-butylamine (35 IK) is much higher than that of tertiary butylamine (b.p. 319 K).

MP Board Solutions

Amines Other Important Exercises

Amines Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Aniline reacts with cold nitrous acid (NaNO2 + HCl) and gives:
(a) C6H5OH
(b) C6H5N2Cl
(C) C6H5NO2
(d) C6H5Cl.
Answer:
(b) C6H5N2Cl

Question 2.
A nitrogen-containing compound, on heating with chloroform and alcoholic KOH give vapours of disagreeable odour. The compound can be:
(a) Nitrobenzene
(b) Benzamide
(c) N-N, dimethylaniline
(d) Aniline.
Answer:
(d) Aniline.

Question 3.
Ethylamine reacts with nitrous acid to form:
(a) Ammonia
(b) Nitrous oxide
(c) Ethane
(d) Nitrogen.
Answer:
(d) Nitrogen.

Question 4.
A compound which gives oily nitrosoamine with nitrous acid at low temperature:
(a) Methyl amine
(b) Dimethyl amine
(c) Trimethyl amine
(d) Triethyl amine.
Answer:
(b) Dimethyl amine

Question 5.
Which of the following has strongest basic character:
(a) C6H5NH2
(b) (CH3)2NH
(C) (CH3)3N
(d) NH3.
Answer:
(b) (CH3)2NH

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Benzene diazonium chloride gives on hydrolysis:
(a) Chlorobenzene
(b) Phenol
(c) Alcohol
(d) Benzene.
Answer:
(b) Phenol

Question 7.
In the reaction C6H5CHO + C6H5NH2 → C6H5N = CHC6H5 + H2O + C6H5N = CHC6H5 is known as:
(a) Aldol
(b) Schiff’s reagent
(c) Schiffs base
(d) Benedict reagent.
Answer:
(c) Schiffs base

Question 8.
Nitrobenzene gives N-phenyl hydroxyl amine when it reacts with:
(a) Sn/HCl
(b) C6H5CH2NH-CH3
(c) Zn / NaOH
(d) Zn / NH4Cl.
Answer:
(c) Zn / NaOH

Question 9.
Which of the mixture when reacts with ale. KOH known as Carbyl amine reaction:
(a) Chloroform and Ag powder
(b) Trihalogenated methane and primary amine
(c) Alkyl trihalide and primary amine
(d) Alkyl cyanide and primary amine.
Answer:
(b) Trihalogenated methane and primary amine

Question 10.
Which of the following gas is responsible for Bhopal gas tragedy in 1984:
(a) CH3 – N = C = O
(b) CH3-C=N = S
(c) CHCl3
(d) C6H5COCl.
Answer:
(a) CH3 – N = C = O

Question 11.
Oil of Mirbane is:
(a) Aniline
(b) Nitrobenzene
(c) p-nitroaniline
(d) p-aminoazobenzene.
Answer:
(b) Nitrobenzene

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
The product of mustard oil reaction is:
(a) Alkyl isothiocyanate
(b) Dithiocarbonamide
(c) Dithioethyl acetate
(d) Thioether.
Answer:
(a) Alkyl isothiocyanate

Question 13.
Aniline is purified by:
(a) Steam distillation
(b) Vacuum distillation
(b) Simple distillation
(d) Solvent extraction.
Answer:
(a) Steam distillation

Question 14.
Amine which will not react with Acetyl chloride, is:
(a) CH3NH2
(b) (CH3)2NH
(c) (CH3)2N
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) (CH3)2N

Question 15.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 41
(a) Gattermann’s reaction
(b) Sandmayer’s reaction
(c) Wurtz’s reaction
(d) Frankland’s reaction.
Answer:
(b) Sandmayer’s reaction

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Aromatic amines are …………… in water.
  2. Amines are benzolyate in presence of NaOH. This reaction is called ……………
  3. By reacting with nitrous acid 1° amine form alcohol and 2° amine form ……………
  4. Reaction of 2° amine with nitrous acid represent ……………
  5. Aniline on sulphonation with sulphuric acid forms ……………
  6. With metal (Transition metals) ions amine establish co-ordination and form ……………
  7. By reduction, cyanide forms …………… and isocyanide forms ……………
  8. Benzoic acid reacts with hydrozoic acid to form ……………
  9. All aliphatic amines are more …………… than ammonia.
  10. 1° and 2° amine react with Grignard reagent to form ……………
  11. Basic nature of amine is due to the presence of …………… on nitrogen atom.
  12. Primary amines on heating with …………… and …………… form alkyl isocyanides.
  13. C6H5-COOH + …………… C6H5NH2 + N2 + CO2.
  14. Mixture of T.N.T. and ammonium nitrate is known as ……………
  15. On reacting aniline with HCl and NaNO2 at 0°C temperature benzene diazoniu chloride is formed. This is called…………… reaction.
  16. Ethyl amine is a …………… base than ammonia.
  17. Trinitrotoluene is an …………… compound.
  18. On heating alkyl isocyanide to 250°C …………… is formed.

Answer:

  1. Insoluble
  2. Schotten Baumann
  3. Nitrosamine
  4. Libermann nitroso test
  5. Sulphanilic acid
  6. Complex ion
  7. Primary amine, secondary amine
  8. Aniline
  9. Basic
  10. Alkane
  11. lone electron pair
  12. Chloroform and caustic soda
  13. N3H
  14. amytoi
  15. diazotisation
  16. stronger
  17. explosive
  18. Alkyl cyanide.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Match the followings:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 42

  1. (c) Nitrosoamine
  2. (d) SchifFs base
  3. (b) Chloropicrin
  4. (e) Heinsberg reagent
  5. (a) Aromatic primary amine
  6. (g) Explosive.
  7. (f) Smell of mustard oil

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 43
Answer:

  1. (e) C6H5SO2Cl
  2. (d) Explosive
  3. (a) Chloropicrin
  4. (c) C6H5N2Cl
  5. (b) Alcohol

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 44
Answer:

  1. (d) Phenyl methyl amine
  2. (e) N-Methyl Benzenamine
  3. (a) N-Phenyl Benzenamine
  4. (c) N-Methyl Ethanamine
  5. (f) Prop-2-en-nitrile.
  6. (b) 2-Ethyl propan-nitrile

Question 4.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. Why aniline turns blackish brown in the open air?
  2. Tertiary amine does not acetanilised, why?
  3. Which isomer of C3H9N is least basic and having lowest b.p.?
  4. Which amine gives a diazotization reaction?
  5. The compound obtained when primary aromatic amine when heated with CHCl3 and ale. KOH.
  6. Secondary amine can be identified by.
  7. What is nitrating mixture ?
  8. Nitrobenzene is known as.
  9. MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 45
  10. Write the nature of amine.
  11. Primary nitroalkane reacts with nitrous acid to form which compound.
  12. Reagent used for the separation of Primary Secondary and Tertiary amine.
  13. What do 1° and 2° amine form on reacting with phosgene ?
  14. MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 46
  15. What is obtained by reacting amines with chloroform?
  16. In which form is amine used in organic synthesis ?
  17. What does Ethylamine form on oxidation in the presence of KMnO ?
  18. On adding Br2 water in aqueous solution of C6H5NH2which precipitate is obtained ?
  19. Which amine is obtained by the reduction of cyanide in the presence of Pt or Ni ?
  20. Write the formula of X:
    MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 47
  21. Write the name of reaction:
  22. MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 48
  23. What is the name of reaction for preparation of methyl isocyanide ?

Answer:

  1. Aniline oxidizes by air
  2. Active hydrogen is absent
  3. Tertiary amine
  4. All primary aromatic amine
  5. Phenyl isocyanide
  6. By Libermann test
  7. Cone. HNO3 and cone. H2SO4
  8. Oil of Mirbane
  9. Diazotisation
  10. Nitrolic acid
  11. Basic
  12. Heinsberg reagent
  13. Substituted urea
  14. Carbylamine reaction
  15. Alkyl isocyanide
  16. Reagent
  17. Aldehyde
  18. Symmetrical tribromoaniline
  19. 1° amine
  20. C6H5NH2 (Aniline)
  21. Schmidt reaction
  22. Carbylamine reaction.

MP Board Solutions

Amines  Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Lower aliphatic amines are soluble in water while aromatic amines are not. Give reason.
Answer:
Lower aliphatic amines are soluble in water because of their tendency to form intermolecular hydrogen bonding with water. While aromatic amines because of high molar mass and steric effect are unable to form intermolecular hydrogen bonding and are insoluble in water.

Question 2.
Write a short note on Schotten Baumann reaction.
Answer:
Aromatic acid chloride reacts with phenol and aniline in presence of aqueous NaOH or pyridine. The reaction is known as Schotten Baumann reaction.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 31

Question 3.
What is ‘aniline black’ ? Write its two uses.
Answer:
When aniline is oxidised by acidic KMnO4, a black substance is formed which is known as aniline black.
Uses:

  • In manufacturing of black colour.
  • In manufacturing of useful compounds.

Question 5.
Explain the relative base strength of methylamine, dimethylamine, and trimethylamine.
Answer:
Amines have a lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom. This lone pair is available for being shared with a proton (or a Lewis acid). Therefore, amines are fairly strong bases. Amines com¬bine with water to form alkyl ammonium hydroxide.
R – NH2 + H2O\(\rightleftharpoons\)RNH3+OH \(\rightleftharpoons\) RNH3+ + OH

Alkylamines are stronger bases than ammonia. This is because the alkyl groups have an electron releasing effect (-I effect), i.e., the alkyl groups increase the availability of the lone pair of electrons for protonation. The greater the number of electrons releasing alkyl groups, the lone pairs will become more available for protonation.

The introduction of one methyl group strengthens the base. The second methyl group further strengthens the base. However, the third methyl group decreases the strength of the base due to its steric effect (over-crowding) which retards the protonation of amines. Thus, the base strength is in the order (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > (CH3)3N > NH3

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions:
(a) C2H5I + H2N – C2H5
(b)CH2NH2 + (NaNO2 + HC1) →

Answer:
(a) This reaction is alkylation and ultimate product quartemary ammonium salt is formed
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 32

(b) CH3NH2 + (NaNO2 + HCl) → CH3OH + N2 + H2O

Question 6.
Ethyl amine is more basic than ammonia, why ?
Answer:
The value of Ka = 4.5 x 10-4 for ethyl amine and for ammonia it is 1.8 x 10-5. Larger is the Kb value, more basic is the amine and vice-versa. In ethyl amine the availabil-ity of lone pair of electrons on nitrogen atom increases due to the +1 inductive effect of the ethyl group. Hence, this lone pair of electrons can easily accept a proton. This explains why ethyl amine is more basic than ammonia.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Write short notes on:

  1. Schmidt reaction
  2. Mustard oil reaction.

Answer:
(i) Schmidt reaction:
When hydrazoic acid dissolved in chloroform or benzene, react with mono carboxylic acid in presence of H2SO4 at 55°C, primary amine is obtained.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 33

(ii) Mustard oil reaction:
When aliphatic primary amine is heated with carbon
disulphide and HgCl2 alkyl isothiocyanate is formed, which has smell like mustard oil. Therefore, this reaction is called mustard oil reaction.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 34

Question 9.
Give a Heinsberg method to identify primary, secondary and tertiary amines.
Answer:
Heinsberg method:
This method is capable to differentiate primary, secondary and tertiary amines. Amines are heated with benzene sulphonyl chloride (Heinsberg reagent) and various product are obtained.

1. Primary amine:
These form sulphonamide which are soluble in KOH.
C6H5SO2Cl + R – NH2 → C6H5SO2(NHRN – alkyl benzene sulphonamide) + HCl

2. Secondary amine:
Secondary amine also form sulphonamide which are insoluble in KOH.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 35

3. Tertiary amine : Tertiary amine does not react.
C6H5SO2Cl + R3N → No reaction

Question 9.
What is the difference between Alkyl nitrite and nitroalkane ?
Answer:
Nitrous acid exist in two isomeric forms:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 36

Thus, two alkyl derivatives of nitrous acid are formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 37

Thus, it is clear that in nitroalkane, alkyl radical is linked to nitrogen, whereas in alkylnitrite alkyl radical is linked to oxygen atom. Alkyl nitrite is ester whereas nitroalkane is the derivative of paraffin.

Question 10.
Write only chemical equation for the following conversions:
(i) Conversion of methyl cyanide into C6H5NH2.
(ii) Conversion of C6H5NH2 into chlorobenzene.
Answer:

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 38

Question 11.
Differentiate between primary, secondary and tertiary nitroalkane.
Answer:
Primary, secondary and tertiary nitroalkanes can be differentiated on the basis of following reaction:
(i) Primary nitroalkanes react with nitrous acid forming nitrolic acid which is soluble in NaOH or KOH forming red colour.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 39

(ii) Secondary nitroalkane reacts with nitrous acid forming pseudonitrole which gives blue colour with NaOH.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 40
(iii) Tertiary nitroalkane does not react with nitrous acid because it does not have hydrogen atom.

Question 12.
Write the points of difference between Ethyl amine and Aniline.
Answer:
Differences between Ethyl amine and Aniline:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 49

Question 13.
Why can aromatic primary amine not be synthesized by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.
Answer:
In Gabriel Phthalimide reaction potassium salt of phthalimide is formed. It easily reacts with alkyl halide and forms the related alkyl derivative.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 50

But aryl halide do not react with potassium phthalimide because in haloarene (aryl halide) due to partial double bond character breaking of C – X bond is difficult. Thus, aromatic amine can not be prepared by Gabriel Phthalimide synthesis.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 51

Question 14.
Write any four points to differentiate between Ethyl nitrite and nitro ethane.
Answer:
Difference between nitro ethane and ethyl nitrite.
1. Structure:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 52

2. Boiling Point:
Boiling point of nitroethane is higher than Ethyl nitrite.

3. Reduction:
Nitroethane forms primary amine and ethyl nitrite forms ammonia.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 53

4. Hydrolysis:
Nitroethane does not form alcohol with NaOH whereas Ethyl nitrite forms alcohol with NaOH.
C2H5 – O – N + NaOH → C2H5OH + NaNO2

Question 15.
What is Mendius reaction ?
Ans. Reduction of alkyl cyanides by sodium and alcohols yield primary amine. This reaction is called Mendius reaction.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 54

Question 16.
How will you obtain:

  1. Ethyl amine from methyl cyanide
  2. Methyl amine from acid amide
  3. Ethyl amine from ethyl alcohol
  4. Ethyl amine from methyl amine.

Answer:
1. Ethyl amine from methyl cyanide:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 55

2. Methyl amine from acid-amide:
CH3CONH2 + Br2 + 4KOH → CH3 – NH2 + 2KBr + K2CO3 + 2H2O

3. Ethyl amine from ethylimg
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 56

4. Ethyl amine from methyl amine:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 57

Question 17.
Write any four difference between ethyl cyanide and ethyl iso cyanide.
Answer:
Difference between ethyl cyanide and ethyl iso cyanide:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 58

Question 18.
Give reaction of ethyl amine with following:
(a) HNO2
(b) C6H5COCl
(C) CS2.
Answer:
(a) HNO2
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 59

(b) N-ethyl acetamide is formed
C2H5NH2 + CH3COCl → CH3CONHC2H5 + HCl

(c) Ethyl isothiocyanate is formed. This reaction is also known as mustard oil reaction.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 60

Question 19.
Why aniline is less basic than ethyl amine ?
Answer:
Aniline is less basic than ethyl amine as due to resonance of benzene nucleus, the lone pair of electron of nitrogen atom is attracted towards nucleus and gets delocalised in the ring. Thus, electron pair is liberated with difficulty in aniline than ethyl amine. Hence, its basic property is less than ethyl amine. The delocalisation of electron as a result of resonance is shown as follows:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 61

Question 20.
Boiling point of aniline is higher than the hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses, but lower than corresponding alcohols and carboxylic acids. Clarify the statement
Answer:
Primary amines are polar and in them dipolar [Nδ- – Nδ+] bond is present, in which molecules of amines are associated by hydrogen bond. That is why their boiling point is higher than alkanes of comparable molecular masses.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 62

Due to lesser electronegativity of nitrogen than oxygen, association in alcohols and carboxylic acids occur due to strong H – bonds. Whereas in amines association is due to weak H — bond. Therefore, boiling and melting point of amines is lower than corresponding alcohols and carboxylic acids.

Question 21.
Explain nitration of Aniline.
Answer:
Direct nitration of aniline is not possible because NH3 group gets oxidized by HNO3 but on nitrating under
controlled conditions instead of o- and p- place m – nitroderivative is formed. In acidic medium due to protonation
of — NH2 group, electron attracting tendency of NH3+ formed increases by which instead of o- or p- directing Anilinium ion acts as m — directing.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 63

Question 22.
Why is aniline acetylated before nitration ? Give necessary equation.
Or,
Direct nitration of aniline is not possible. Explain and how it is nitrated?
Answer:
Direct nitration of aniline is not possible because amino group of aniline is oxidised by nitric acid. So for nitration of aniline firstly amino group (- NH2) is protected by acetylation and then nitrated.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 64

Question 23.
How will you obtain: (Give only equations)

  1. Methyl amine from Ethyl amine.
  2. Phenol from Aniline.
  3. Ethyl amine from methyl amine.

Answer:
1. Methyl amine from Ethyl amine:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 65
2. Phenol from Aniline:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 66

3. Ethyl amine from methyl amine:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 67

Question 24.
Explain the following:

  1. Preparation of pure amine is difficult by the ammonolysis of alkyl halide.
  2. Methyl amine reacts with FeCl3 in water to give precipitate of ferric hydroxide.
  3. AgCl is soluble in methyl amine.

Answer:
1. By the ammonolysis of alkyl halide a mixture of primary, secondary and tertiary amine is obtained.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 68

Separation of these amines is difficult; therefore it is difficult to obtain pure amine by ammonolysis of alkyl halide.

2. Methyl amine releases OH ion in water which reacts with FeCl3 as follows to give precipitate of Fe(OH)3.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 69

3. Methyl amine forms a soluble complex with AgCl and this way AgCl is soluble in methyl amine.
AgCl + 2CH3NH2 → [Ag(CH3NH2 )2 ]+ ClSoluble complex

Amines Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write reduction reactions of nitro-benzene:
(a) In acid medium
(b) Neutral medium
(c) In basic medium.

Or,
Describe reduction reactions of nitro-benzene in different conditions.
Answer:
Reduction of Nitro-benzene:
Nitro-benzene is readily reduced. This gives different compounds under different conditions depending upon the pH of the medium and the nature of the reducing agent. The reduction takes place in three steps:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 70

(a) Acidic medium:
When reduced with Sn + HCl or Fe + HCl, gives aniline.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 71

(b) Neutral medium:
When reduced with aluminium mercury couple or zinc dust and ammonium chloride, phenyl hydroxyl amine is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 72

(c) In basic medium (Alkaline medium):
(i) Reduction with alkaline sodium arsenite:
Azoxy benzene is formed.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 73

(ii) Reduction with zinc dust and caustic soda:
Hydrozo benzene is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 74

Question 2.
How will you obtain the following from aniline ? Give only chemical equation:
(a) Phenol
(b) Methane
(c) Tribromoaniline
(d) Phenylisocvanide.
Answer:
(a) Phenol:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 76
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 77

(b) Methane:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 78

(c) Tribromoaniline:
By treating aniline with bromine water, yellow coloured 2,4,6 – tribromoaniline is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 79

(d) Phenylisocyanide:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 80

Question 3.
An organic compound [A] having molecular formula C2H5O2 on reduction gives compound [B] which react with HNO2 and form compound [C]. Compound [B] on reaction with chloroform alcoholic KOH, change into bad smelling compound [D]. Which on reduction forms amine [E]. Which formula will you assign for compound [A], [B], [C], [D] and [E] ? Explain reactions also.
Answer:
[A] → C2H5NO2 (Nitro ethane)
[B] → C2H5NH2(Ethyl amine)
[C] → C2H5OH (Ethanol)
[D] → C2H5N = C (Ethyl iso cyanide)
[E] → C2H5NHCH3(N-methyl amino ethane)
Reactions:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 81

Question 4.
How will you obtain the following:
(i) Sulphanilic acid from Aniline
(ii) p-amino azo benzene from aniline.
Answer:
(i) Sulphanilic acid from Aniline
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 82
(ii) p-amino azo benzene from aniline.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 83

Question 5.
What happens when:
(a) Ammonium acetate is made to react with alumina at 500°C.
(b) Methyl cyanide is subjected to alkaline hydrolysis.
(c) Benzamide is treated with P2Os.
(d) H2 gas is passed through phenyl isocyanide in presence of Ni.
(e) Methyl isocyanide is heated at 250°C.
Answer:
(a) Methyl cyanide is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 84
(b) Ammonia gas is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 85
(c) Phenyl cyanide is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 86
(d) N-methyl aniline is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 87
(e) Methyl cyanide is formed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 88

Question 6.
How is primary amine obtained from nitro-alkane ? Give equation.
(ii) How is primary alcohol obtained from primary amine ? Give equation.
(iii) Among N-propyl amine and isopropyl amine which is more basic ?
Answer:
(i) Nitro-alkane is reduced by LiAlH4 or by H2 in presence of Ni or Pt to obtain primary amine.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 89
(ii) Primary aliphatic amine react with nitrous acid to form primary alcohol.
C2H5NH2 + HONO → C2H5OH + N2 + H2O
(iii) Normal propyl amine is more basic.

Question 7.
How will you obtain the following (Give only equation):
(a) Ethyl amine from nitroethane,
(b) N-methyl hydroxyl amine from nitroethane,
(c) Chloropicrin from nitromethane,
(d) Nitrobenzene from benzene diazonium chloride,
(e) Trinitrobenzene (T.N.B.)from nitrobenzene.
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 90

Question 8.
Explain the laboratory method of preparation of ethyl amine under the following heads:
(a) Procedure
(b) Equation of reaction
(c) Diagram
(d) Physical properties.
Answer:
Laboratory method of preparation of ethyl amine: In laboratory ethyl amine is prepared by Hofmann Bromoamide reaction. In this process reaction of propanamide with bromine and caustic potash solution takes place. All steps in the process are following:
C2H5CONH2 + Br2 → C2H5CONHBr + HBr
KOH + HBr → KBr + H2O
C2H5CONHBr + KOH → C2H5NCO + KBr + H2O KOH-
C2 H5NCO + 2KOH → C2H5NH2+K2CO3
C2 H5 CONH2 + Br2 + 4KOH → C2H5NH2 + 2KBr + K2CO3 + 2H2O
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 91

Procedure:
In a round bottom distillation flask equivalent quantities of bromine and propanamide is taken and 10% KOH solution is added in it. Now 50% KOH solution is added in excess and the flask is heated on water both up to 57-67°C. When the solution becomes colourless, ethyl amine starts to be distilled which is absorbed in dil. HCl.

Physical properties:
It is a colourless liquid with an odour like ammonia which is soluble in water and organic solvent. It is a combustible substance. Its boiling point is 19°C.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
Write laboratory method of preparation of aniline. Give all chemical equations of this process.
Or
Describe commercial method of preparation of aniline.
Answer:
Laboratory Method for the Preparation of Aniline:
Aniline is prepared in the laboratory by the reduction of nitro-benzene with tin and hydrochloric acid.
C6H5NO2 +6[H] C6H5NH2 + 2H2O

Experiment:
Nitro-benzene (20 g) and granulated tin (40 g) are taken in a round-bottom flask and a reflux condenser is fitted. Now hydrochloric acid (100 ml) is added in small amounts (10 ml at a time). The flask is shaken after each addition of acid and the temperature is not allowed to rise above 90° C. The flask is heated on a water bath till the smell of nitro-benzene disappears. On cooling the flask, a solid mass of molecular formula (C6H5 NH2 .HCl)2 .SnCl4 separates out.
Sn + 4HCI → SnCI4 + 4H
C6H5NO2 + 6[H] ) → C6H5NH2 + 2H2O
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 103
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 92
The solid mass is treated with concentrated NaOH solution. So that a clear alkaline solution is obtained. Aniline is liberated and floats as a dark brown coloured oil.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 104
From this aniline is obtained by steam distillation.
Commercially aniline is manufactured by reduction of nitrobenzene. This is done in presence of Fe water and cone. HCl.
Fe + 2HCl → FeCl2 + 2H
C6H5 NO2 + 6H → C6H5NH2 + 2H2O

Question 10.
Distinguish among p, s and t amines under the following points:

  1. Reaction with HNO2
  2. Carbyl amine reaction
  3. Mustard oil reaction
  4. Reaction with acid halide
  5. Reaction with alkyl halide
  6. Reaction with C6H5SO2Cl.

Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 93

Question 11.
Write down the chemical equation representing preparation of nitrobenzene in laboratory and give the following chemical reaction of nitrobenzene:
(a) Nitration
(b) Sulphonation.
Answer:
Preparation of nitrobenzene in laboratory: Nitrobenzene is prepared in laboratory by treating benzene with a mixture of cone. HNO3 and cone. H2SO4 at 60°C.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 94
Reaction of nitrobenzene:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 95

(a) Nitration:
Nitrobenzene forms m – dinitrobenzene when heated with fuming HNO3 and cone. H2SO4 .

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 96
(b) Sulphonation:
Nitrobenzene forms m -nitrobenzene sulphonic acid on heating with fuming H2SO4 .

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 97

Question 12.
Write the possible isomers of C4H11N.
Answer:
(i) Position isomerism:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 98

(ii) Chain isomerism:

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 99

(iii) Metamerism:

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 100

Question 13.
Write the type of possible isomers of C3H9N.
Answer:
(i) Functional group isomerism:
CH3—CH2—CH2—NH2
n-propyl amine (1°)

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 101

All functional group are isomers.
(ii) Position Isomerism:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines - 102
All are position isomers.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market

Finance market Important Questions

Finance market Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer :

Question 1.
Primary and Secondary market:
(a) Compete with each other
(b) Complement to each other
(c) Functions independently
(d) Control each other
Answer:
(b) Complement to each other

Question 2.
The number of stock exchange in India was :
(a) 20
(b) 21
(c) 24
(d) 23
Answer:
(c) 24

Question 3.
REPO is:
(a) Repurchase agreement
(b) Reliance petroleum
(c) Read and process
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Repurchase agreement

Question 4.
NSEI commenced future trading in the year:
(a) 1999
(b) 2000
(c) 2001
(d) 2002
Answer:
(b) 2000

Question 5.
The settlement cycle in NSEI is :
(a) T + 5
(b) T + 3
(c) T + 2
(d) T + 1
Answer:
(c) T + 2

Question 6.
Liquidity is formed by :
(a) Organised market
(b) unorganized market
(c) Primary market
(d) Secondary market
Answer:
(c) Primary market

Question 7.
The headquarter of SEBI is :
(a) Delhi
(b) Mumbai
(c) kolkata
(d) Chennai
Answer:
(b) Mumbai

Question 8.
The foremost stock exchange was established in :
(a) Delhi
(b) London
(c) Tokyo
(d) New york
Answer:
(b) London

Question 9.
In India the main organ of unorganised market is :
(a) Desi banker
(b) Mahajan and Sahukar
(c) Both ‘(a)’ and ‘(b)’
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) Both ‘(a)’ and ‘(b)’

Question 10.
The axis of central bank is :
(a) Reserve bank
(b) Commercial bank
(c) Co-operative bank
(d) Desi bank.
Answer:
(a) Reserve bank

Question 11.
NSEI was established in :
(a) 1900
(b) 1991
(c) 1992
(d) 1994.
Answer:
(c) 1992

Question 12.
These are not securities of capital market:
(a) Equity share
(b) Preferential shares
(c) Debentures
(d) Commercial bill.
Answer:
(d) Commercial bill.

Question 13.
The first stock exchange of India was established in the year:
(a) 1857
(b) 1877
(c) 1887
(d) 1987.
Answer:
(c) 1887

Question 14.
Treasury bills are :
(a) Instrument of short term borrowings ‘
(b) Long term borrowings
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Instrument of short term borrowings

Question 15.
For stock exchange the servies of SEBI is :
(a) Volantary
(b) Essential
(c) Not essential
(d) Compulsory.
Answer:
(d) Compulsory.

Question 16.
In 2004 the number of stock exchange in India was :
(a) 25
(b) 21
(c) 23
(d) 24
Answer:
(d) 24

Question 17.
Only buying security takes place in :
(a) Stock exchange
(b) Primary market
(c) Capital market
(d) Money market.
Answer:
(b) Primary market

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. The paid up capital of NSEI is ……………..
  2. OTCEI maintains the liquidity in the securities of…………….. companies.
  3. OTCEI was established in ……………..
  4. NSEI was established in ……………..
  5. Stock exchange which provides nation wide investor base to small companies is ……………..

Answer:

  1. Rs. 3 crores
  2. Small
  3. 1990
  4. 1992
  5. OTCEI.

Question 3.
Write the answer in one word/sentence :

  1. Which market deals with long-term funds ?
  2. Where is the purchase and sale of securities take place ?
  3. In which market dealings of short-term funds take place ?
  4. Which organization is formed to protect and safeguard the interest of investors ?
  5. Write the name of one all India level stock exchange.
  6. Which instrument is issue at discount ?
  7. Which market is regulated and developed by SEBI ?
  8. Which capital market is related with new issues ?
  9. Which Stock Exchange is the greatest stock Exchange of the country ?
  10. What are the two parts of capital market ?

Answer:

  1. Capital market
  2. Stock exchange
  3. Money market
  4. SEBI
  5. NSEI
  6. Treasury bill
  7. Stock exchange
  8. Primary market
  9. Bombay Stock Exchange
  10. Primary, Secondary.

Question 4.
Write true or false :

  1. Sebi is established to protect and safeguard the interest of investors.
  2. In India there are 24 stock exchanges.
  3. Headquarter of SEBI is in Mumbai.
  4. Full form of SEBI is securities and exchange board of India.
  5. In stock exchange transaction of new securities take place.
  6. There is no control of SEBI on Mutual fund.
  7. Money market deals long-term funds.
  8. Money market is controlled by SEBI.
  9. For industrial development healthy capital market is must.
  10. There is difference between the primary market and secondary market.

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True
  3. True
  4. True
  5. True
  6. False
  7. False
  8. False
  9. True
  10. True

Question 5.
Match the columns :
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 1
Answer:
1. (d)
2. (e)
3. (b)
4. (a)
5. (c)
6. (g)
7. (f)
8. (i)
9. (h)

Finance Market Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define capital market.
Answer:
“An individual or private firm receiving deposits and dealing in hundies or lending money. Those who do not accept deposits were to be treated as money lenders.”

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Write the names of two parts capital market ?
Answer:
There are two parts of capital market:

  1. Capital market.
  2. Money market.

Question 3.
What do you mean by stock exchange ?
Answer:
A stock exchange is a place for the purchase and sale of its industrial and financial curities Shares, debentures, funds etc.) take place.

Question 4.
What is the full form of SEBI ?
Answer:
Full form of SEBI is : Securities and Exchange board of India.

Question 5.
Mfiatdo you mean by money market ?
Answer:
Money market refers to that market where transaction of lending and borrowing of short term funds take place.

Question 6.
What do you mean by Treasery bill ?
Answer:
A treasury bill is basically an instrument of short-term borrowing by the government of India maturing in less than one year.

Question 7.
Write the elements of money market.
Answer:

  1. Central bank.
  2. Commercial banks.
  3. Co-operative banks.
  4. Saving bank.
  5. Acceptance house.

Question 8.
Write two characteristics of Debentures.
Answer:
The characteristics of Debentures are :
(1) Debenture holder has the right to get interest.
(2) Debenture is merely a written instrument signed by the company under its common seal acknowledging the debt due by it to its holders.

Question 9.
Write three characteristics of capital market.
Answer:
The characteristics of capital market are :

  1. SEBI controls the capital market.
  2. In it, transactions in long-term funds take place.
  3. Capital market arranges capital in large scale.

Question 10.
What do you mean by secondary market ?
Answer:
Under secondary market capital is formed or received, from various sources. Generally it is called Stocks Exchange.

Question 11.
Whatis SEBI.
Answer:
SEBI was constituted by government of India in April 1988 as administrative body. It was aseparate body for orderly functioning of capital market.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
What do you mean by RAPO rate ?
Answer:
The rate at which reserve bank of India. Repurchase the government securities is  RAPO rate.

Question 13.
Write the name of index of NSE ?
Answer:
The name of index is called NIFTY.

Question 14.
“Blue Chip” shares are of which company ?
Answer:
Shares of a big prosperous company is called “Blue chip”.

Question 15.
In India how many stock exchanges are there ? Which is the oldest one ?
Answer:
There are total 24 stock exchanges in India. Mumbai stock exchange is the oldest one.

Question 16.
When preference shareholders can vote ?
Answer:
Preference shareholders generally don’t have the voting rights but the preference shareholders can use voting rights only in matters pertaining to their interest and not other matters.

Question 17.
What is debenture ?
Answer:
Money received as a loan is called ‘Borrowed capital’. The documents issued to the lender for money borrowed from him by the company is called debenture.
Debenture is merely a written instrument signed by the company under its common seal acknowledging in debt due by it to its holders.

MP Board Solutions

Question 18.
What do you mean by commercial bill ?
Answer:
Commercial bill is a bill of exchange used to finance the working capital requirements of business firms. It is a short term negotiable self liquidating instrument. Which is used to finance the credit sales of firms.

Question 19.
How is value determined in securities in share bazar ?
Answer:
Share market provides a platform for securities here forces of demand and supply work together. Thus value is fixed by securities.

Question 20.
What do you mean by Boli price ?
Answer:
The price which a customer is willing to play for securities is called Boli price.

Question 21.
Write the elements of capital market.
Answer:

  1. Development bank.
  2. Commercial banks
  3. Stock exchange.

Question 22.
Write the objectives of SEBI.
Answer:
The objectives of the establishment of SEBI are as follows :

  1. The main objective of SEBI is to provide security to the investors.
  2. To attract the savings of the people to the capital market.
  3. To keep an eye on activities of the brokers in order to control the capital market.
  4. To promote development of securities market.
  5. To provide efficient services to all the parties operating in the capital market.

Question 23.
What do you mean by Financial assets ?
Answer:
Debentures, Shares, Bills etc. are included into Financial assets.

Finance Market Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the importance of money market.
Answer:
Money market provides important functions and’ services which increases the importance of money market. The importance of money market are as follows :

1. Provides funds: Money market helps financial institutions, business enterprises to meet their short term funds requirement. This ensures smooth operations and functioning of business enterprises.

2. Use of surplus funds: If the capital of any enterprise remains unused that it will lead to business losses. Thus, through capital market the surplus funds are utilised time to time.

3. Helps in financial mobility : By sending the securities from one area to another and by investing money market helps in financial mobility. For the industrial and economical development of a nation financial mobility is essential.

4. Equilibrium between demand and supply : Necessary steps and initiatives are taken by money market time to time for maintaining equilibrium between demand and supply.

5. Economy in the use of cash : The use of cash is properly performed through money market. The procedure of this market is not complex that’s why unnecessary expenses are not incurred for the use of cash funds.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Write the types of capital market.
Answer:
Capital market is two types :

1. Organized capital market: In organised capital market there remain banks and different financial institutions in Indian capital market, Reserve Bank of India, State Bank of India, different nationalized banks, financial institutions, post office, savings bank, stock exchange etc. are included.

2. Unorganized capital market: In an unorganized capital market, indigenous bankers, merchants, personal investment, institutions as chit funds etc. are included.

Question 3.
What do you mean by Treasury bill ?
Answer:
Treasury Bill: A Treasury bill is basically an instrument  on mg by the Government of India maturing in less than one year. They are also known as Zero Coupon Bonds issued by the Reserve Bank of India on behalf of the Central Government to meet its short-term requirement of funds. Treasury bills are issued in the form of a promissory note. They are highly liquid and have assured yield and negligible risk of default. They are issued at a price which is lower than their face value and repaid at par.

The difference between the price at which the treasury bills are issued and their redemption value is the interest receivable on them and is called discount. Treasury bills are available for a minimum amount of Rs 25,000 and in multiples therefore. Example: Suppose an investor purchases a 91 days Treasury bill with a face value of Rs. 1,00,000 for Rs. 96,000. By holding the bill until the maturity date, the investor receives Rs. 1,00,000. The difference of Rs. 4,000 between the proceeds received at maturity and the amount paid to purchase the bill represents the interest received by him.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What do you mean by RAPO and Reverse RAPO Rate.
Answer:
RAPO Rate : RAPO rate is that rate at which RBI gives loans to bank for a particular period of time. A bank repurchase go  securities and is exchange receives wealth. Due to discount in RAPO rate the bank gets money at low rate whereas due to increase in RAPO rate the loan from RBI becomes expensive. If it makes loan cheper to bank it reduces the RAPO rate.
Reverse RAPO rate : It is a rate of transaction of short term loan, at which Reserve Bank of India takes loan from commercial bank within our country.

Question 5.
What do you mean by CD ? or certificate of deposit ?
Answer:
Certificate of deposit: Certificates of deposit (CD) are unsecured, negotiable, short-term instruments in bearer form, issued by commercial banks and development financial institutions. They can be issued to individuals, corporations and companies during periods of tight liquidity when the deposit growth of banks is slow but the demand for credit is high. They help to mobilize a large amount of money for short periods.

Question 6.
Differentiate between NSEI and OTCEI.
Answer:
Differences between NSEI and OTCEI:
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 2
Question 7.
What is the difference between Primary and Secondary Market.
Answer:
Differences between Primary and Secondary Market:
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 5
Question 8.
How many stock exchanges are there in India ?
Answer:

Recognized Stock Exchange in India :

  1. The Stock Exchange—Bombay (Mumbai)
  2. The Stock Exchange—Ahmedabad
  3. Madras Exchange Ltd.—Madras (Chennai)
  4. The Calcutta Stock Exchange Association Ltd.—Calcutta (Kolkata)
  5. The Delhi Stock Exchange Association Ltd.—New Delhi
  6. The Madhya Pradesh Stock Exchange—Indore
  7. The Hyderabad Stock Exchange Ltd.—Hyderabad
  8. Bangalore Stock Exchange Ltd.—Bangalore
  9. U.P. Stock Exchange Association—Kanpur
  10. Cochin Stock Exchange Ltd.—Cochin
  11. Pune Stock Exchange Ltd.—Pune
  12. The Ludhiana Stock Exchange Ltd.—Ludhiana
  13. Mangalore Stock Exchange Ltd.—Mangalore
  14. The Magadh Stock Exchange Ltd.—Patna (Bihar)
  15. Jaipur Stock Exchange Ltd.—Jaipur (Rajasthan)
  16. The Gohati Stock Exchange Ltd.—Gohati
  17. The Vadodara Stock Exchange Ltd.—Vadodara
  18. Saurashtra Stock Exchange—Rajkot (Gujarat)
  19. Bhubane ishwar Stock Exchange Association Ltd.—Bhubaneshwar
  20. Thiruva nanthapuram Stock Exchange Ltd.—Kerala.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
What do you mean by NSEI ? What are its objectives ?
Answer:
The I National Stock Exchange of India (N.S.E.I.) was established in the form of a public limit’ »d company in 30th November 1992 with a paid up capital of Rs. 25 crore. On its recognition as a stock exchange under the securities contracts act 1956 in April 1993 NSEI comment Jed operations in the wholesale debt market segment in June 1994. The capital market segrpent commenced operations in November 1994 and operations in derivatives segment commenced in June 2000.

It is an e exchange where business is carried on in the securities of the medium and large sized compar lies and the government securities. On the basis of the transactions of securities done on NSJ 31, it can be divided into two parts :

(i)Whole sale debt market

(ii) Capital market segment.
NSE i has removed the short comings of traditional share markets. It has attempted to provide be  facilities to investors.

Objectives of NSEI: NSEI is established for the following objectives :

  1. To reduce the transaction costs.
  2. To promote trading facilities for equities and debt instrument throughout the nation
  3. To reform Indian securities market in terms of market practices.
  4. To establish a stock exchange of international level.
  5. It aims at the settlement of securities, deals within short period through easy and quick process.
  6. To set up the agenda for useful and effective change in the securities market.

Question 10.
Write the importance of capital market ?
Answer:
The various characteristics of market

  1. Here transactions in long-term funds take place.
  2. In capital market, shares, debentures and securities are bought and sold.
  3. Capital market is emerging and well-organized.
  4. Capital market consists of different institutions having their own interest and limits dons.
  5. It is a Barometer of national growth and dynamic economy.

Question 11.
Write the importance of capital market ?
Answer:
Following are the importance of capital market:

  1. Capital market assist in national capital formation and development.
  2. Capital market plays important role in capital investors and money savers.
  3. Capital market provides liquidity to investors to invest securities.
  4. A number of financial intermediaries work in capital market such as banks, merchants exchanges etc.
  5. Capital market helps to generate savings in the country channelizing the same into small investments in different fields.
  6. It helps in the mobilization of capital.
  7. The goods- are found in market in the same way long term, medium term and short term loans can be found in capital market.
  8. It creates saving tendency among the public.
  9. The head of capital market is the Reserve Bank of India which is the Banker’s bank, it helps in controlling the credit.
  10. Capital market helps in the agricultural, industrial and commercial development of the nation.
  11. In various areas of business organisation capital is needed and it is fulfilled through capital market.
  12. Interest rates remain same due to organised capital market.
  13. Directors and managers of company also give loans when need
  14. Capital market fulfills the need of capital.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
Discuss some characteristics of primary market.
Answer:
The features/characteristics are :

  1. New securities : It deals with new securities only.
  2. Direct issue: Securities can be issued directly by issues on through intermediaries.
  3. Direct promotion of capital market: It promotes capital formatic m by use this funds is investment in plants machinery etc.
  4. Price determination : Prices of securities, generally, are determined by the management of the respective company.
  5. Place : There is no fixed place for primary market.

Question 13.

Explain the functions of Share Market or Stock Exchange.
Answer:
The functions of stock exchange are as follows :

1. Establishing fixed market: Stock exchange establishes a fixed place or market for securities because for the purchase and sale of securities a fixed market is necessary which is provided by stock exchanges.

2. Liquidity of capital : Stock exchange is completely a capital market. Different types of securities are purchased and sold here. That’s why an owner of securities can re convert this investment into cash. In this way stock exchange enhances the liquidity of cap

3. Evaluation: Stock exchange is totally a market of shares. Here there are experts to evaluate the shares and other securities. Correct evaluation of all the secretes are do  by the experts is possible through stock exchanges. Thus investors can safely invest with the help of stock exchanges.

4. Helps in capital formation for new companies : All the new companies need capital, which is difficult for these new companies to form. Thus, through stock exchange it becomes easy to form capital for such type of new firms.

5. Provides business information : Stock exchanges provide necessary information on about securities and capital market to all its members. These information are very useful ft or the member in knowing the general business trends.

6. Contribution to economic growth: Stock exchange encourage the people to their money is securities. This money is invested in industries which helps in the economic development of the nation. Stock exchange acts as a barometer of nation’s economic development and progress.

7. Protection of securities: Various types of securities are transacted in stock exchange. Every transaction takes place under securities contracts (Regulation) Act 1956. The interests of the investors are fully protected. The members of the stock exchange must follows the rules and regulation of stock exchange.

8. Publication : Stock exchange publishes different types of information useful in business. It publishes information in magazines, daily news papers, directories etc. related with stock exchange to common people.

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
Explain the concepts of primary and secondary markets.
Answer:

1. Primary market : The place from where the public directly receives the capital first time as called primary market. Though this system the company issues new shares and debentures to public and forms capital. The ownership is transferred from company to the buyer. There is no fixed location of primary market. During the establishment of company the shares are issued and capital.is formed which is called primary capital. The capital which is received first time from the public through any medium is called primary capital

2. Secondary market: Under secondary market capital is formed or received from various sources and again it is invested this process is called secondary market. Generally it is known as stocks exchange where shares, securities etc. are bought and sold. Secondary market is located at a specified place. The secondary market creates a cluster of shares and stock brokers, underwriters and other well versed in financial matters.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What services are provided by SEBI investors ?
Answer:
The following services are provided by SEBI to its investors :

1. Liquidity of Investment: A stock exchange ensures liquidity of investment by ready marketability of securities. Investors can avail of services of expert professionals who operate on the stock exchange.

2. Collateral Security : As the securities dealt in stock exchanges are negotiable they can be pledged as ‘collateral security’ for raising loans.

3. Safe and Fair Dealings : A stock exchange ensures safe and fair dealings in securities. It makes scrutiny before listing.

4. Educate the Public : Wide publicity of working of a stock exchange helps to educate the public. Investors are able to find out the market value of their investment. They can make a rational choice among various securities. Some stock exchanges publish data and reports. They serve as clearing house of business information and provide advice and guidance to investors.

5. Quick Disposal: Facility for quick disposal of securities at the stock exchanges helps to minimize the risk of investment in securities. It becomes possibility to diversify investments and risks.

Question 16.
What are its trading process of NSEI ?
Answer:

1. Placing the order : In this the seller or purchaser gives information about securities like name of company, price, number, time etc.

2. Conveying the message to computer : The terminal operator after receiving the order feeds it in the computer. NSEI established in all parts of our country continuous feeds the orders in computer.

3. Starting of matching process : As soon as the computer receives messages or orders, it starts the matching process. While matching orders, the best matching order is sought to be found.

4. Accepting orders : After selecting the best matching of buying and selling orders, its list is obtained on computer screen immediately. It tells us at what rate, time and to whom order has been transacted.

5. Delivery and Payment: The delivery and payment are made according to the rules of NSEI after the transaction has been settled.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17
What do you mean by OTCEI ? What are its objectives ?
Answer:
The OTCEI was established under section 25 of the companies act 1956 in October 1990. Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India (ICICI), Unit Trust of India (UTI), Industrial Development Bank of India (IDBI), Industrial Finance Corporation of India (IFCI), General Insurance Corporation of India (GIC), Life Insurance Corporation of India (LIC), SBI capital market limited and Canbank financial services limited are the promoters of OTCEI, The need of OTCEI was felt due to the existance of large number of new and small companies which remain unnoticed and consequently their shares remain largely untraded. The OTCEI is a completely computerised in which buying and selling of securities is absolutely transparent.
Control: The functions and activities of OTCEI is under the supervision of government of India and SEBI.
Objectives : The objects of the establishment of the OTCEI are as follows :

  1. To maintain the liquidity in the securities of small companies.
  2. To provide speedy solution to the problems of investors.
  3. To maintain the transparency of transactions.
  4. To bring the stock exchange within the reach of an ordinary man.
  5. To provide facilities for listing of small companies.

Question 18.
Write the special features of secondary market.
Answer:
Following are the characteristics of secondary market:

1. It creates liquidity: It creates liquidity in securities. By liquidity we mean changing of securities in cash very soon. This work is done by secondary market.

2. It comes after primary market: Under secondary market public do not get the capital first time, under secondary market capital is formed or received from various sources and again it is invested this securities are first sold in primary market and then in secondary market.

3. It has a particular place : Secondary market is located at a particular place which is called an exchanges. It is not compulsory that selling and buying of shares should be done through exchange also. Two persons can do it directly.

4. It encourages new investments : In share market the rates of shares goes on changing. To take advantage of this situation new investors enters this market which encourages industrial sectors.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
What is meant by money market ? Discuss its characteristics.
Answer:
Money market refers to that market where transaction of lending and borrowing of short term funds take place. It is divided into two sectors i.e., organised market and unorganised market. Organised market consists of Reserve Bank of India on the other hand unorganised market consist of indigenous bankers and money lender.
The characteristics of money market:

  1. Dealing in short term fund: Money market provides short term funds for use. By short term use means four period up to one year.
  2. Meeting short term financial needs : Money market focuses on meeting the short term financial requirement.
  3. Safety : The securities of money market and normally safe. They have minimum risk of default due to shorter term and financial soundness of the issuers.
  4. High liquidity: These are highly liquid because they can be changed into cash very easily.
  5. Types of Securities : Treasury bills, certificates of deposits, commercial bills etc. are issued for raising capitals.
  6. Control: Reserve Bank of India controls this type of market.

Question 20.
Write the characteristics of Treasury Bill.
Answer:
Following are the characteristics of Treasury Bill :

(1) Treasury bill is basically an instrument of short term borrowing by the government of India maturing in less than one year.

(2) They are also known as zero coupon bonds issued by Reserve Bank of India. On behalf of the central government to meet its short-term requirement of funds.

(3) Treasury bills are issued in the form of promissory note. They are highly liquid and have assured yield and negligible risk of default.

(4) They are issued at a price which is lower than their face value and rapid at par. The difference between the price at which the treasury bills are issued and their redemption value is the interest receivable on them and is called discount.

Question 21.
Write the features of call money.
Answer:
Following are the features of call money :

(1) Call money is short term finance repayable on demand, with a maturity period of
one day to fifteen days, used for inter-bank transactions. .

(2) Commercial banks have to maintain a minimum cash balance known as cash reserve ratio.

(3) The Reserve Bank of India changes the cash reserves ratio from time to time which in turn affects the amount of funds available to be given as loans by commercial bank.

(4) Call money is a method by which banks borrow from each other to maintain the cash reserve ratio. The interest rate paid on call money loans is known as the call rate. It is a highly volatile rate that varies from day to day and sometimes even hour to hour.

(5) There is an inverse relationship between call rates and other short term money market instruments such as certificates of deposits and other commercial papers.

Question 22.
Describe the function of Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI).
Answer:
The functions of SEBI are as follows :

  1. To protect the interests of investors in the security market and to properly develops the security market.
  2. 10 regulate the business being done in the security market. .
  3. To check the function of stock brokers, share transfer agents, trustees, sub-brokers etc. and register them.
  4. To register and regulate investment schemes like mutual food.
  5. To carry on research work related with security market.
  6. To restrict and prohibit unfair and fraudster of trade practices related with security market.
  7. To promote and control self regulatory organization.
  8. To provide education to the investors related with securities.
  9. To check insiders trading in securities.

Finance Market Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the importance of financial management.
Or
“Finance is the life-blood of business.” Explain in any five points.
Answer:

1. Basis of success of enterprise : Irrespective of the size of organization, financial management paves the way for success of any enterprise, as proper management of funds is assured

2. Increases efficiency: Financial management ensures smooth running of enterprise, as it is essential in every stage of business. Finance is not only essential for promotion but marketing and winding-up.

3. Essential for determination of capital sources : Financial management helps identify proper sources of capital and raise appropriate funds required. Hence, it is very essential.

4. Determination of capital structure: Capital structure refers to the combination of various sources, or the ‘mixes’ of various sources of capital. It is the composition of various sources. Financial management helps in deciding the appropriate capital structure.

5. Best utilization of available funds: Financial management ensures best utilization of existing funds. Financial management consists of estimation of capital, raising of capital and use of it in a judicious way. Hence, the available funds are used in the best possible way.

6. Importance to the Shareholders and Investors : Shareholders and other investors always expect the safety of their money. They invest their small savings in shares and other investment channels and they should be informed of the rate of return they will get on their investments. This is possible through financial management only. In the absence proper knowledge about the return on their investments, the investors may suffer loss at the hands of brokers or middlemen.

7. Importance to the Financial Institutes : The fundamental function of financial institutes is finance only. Therefore, these institutes should possess the required knowledge about financial management so that there is a proper balance between the safety of their money (capital) and its liquidity.

8. Importance to the Employees : Finance management leads to growth of an enterprise and it earns more profit. With growth in profit of the enterprise, the employees will be benefited. Therefore, financial management has both direct and indirect importance for the employees.

9. National Importance : Every developed or developing nation must possess the knowledge of proper financial management. This is the reason why a person having financial expertise is chosen as the finance ministry of the country. The importance of financial management becomes even more important in countries like India which have shortage of finance.

10. Importance to other Persons : Knowledge of financial management is also important for other persons like economists, mercantile experts, brokers, middlemen, politicians because every person in a society has to deal with finance. A person may hurt his financial planning in the absence of knowledge of financial management. Therefore, knowledge of financial management is necessary for every member of the society.

MP Board Solutions

Questions 2.
Write the importance of personnel management.
Answer:
The importance of personnel management can be stated as follows :

1. To achieve targets: Targets of an enterprise can be achieved only if the personnel working in any enterprise are fully satisfied. This is possible if there exists a department to look after the requirements and pacify the grievances of personnel.

2. To face competition : In today’s cut throat competition, it is very hard to be ‘the best’. Mentally satisfied and physically strong personnel ensures that the targets are achieved on time and this work is done by personnel management.

3. Overall personality development: Under the guidance of personnel management, the employees live together and work with full cooperation and under proper discipline. It results in the overall development of the employees.

4. Universal need: For proper development of an enterprise and its success, a personnel management is essential. It is also essential for industries, profession, etc.

5. Increase in efficiency of employees: Proper training, good working environment, appraisals, rewards, etc. done by personnel management increases the efficiency of employees which ultimately helps the organization to achieve its predetermined objects.

Question 3.
Discuss the factors determine working capital requirements of a business enterprises.
Answer:
The capital invested in current assets such as stock of material and finished goods, bills receivable, short-term securities and cash at hand and cash at bank. The two senses of working capital are “Gross Working Capital” and “Net Working Capital”.
The factors which govern the amounts of working capital in a business are :

1. Nature of Business : Public utilities and service organizations require little working capital as sales are on cash basis. There is little time gap between production and sales and these enterprises do not maintain large stock of goods. In trading and manufacturing concerns, on the other hand large amount of working capital is needed to maintain stocks.

2. Size of the Business : The volume of business has a direct influence on working capital requirements. Large firms require greater working capital for investment in current assets and to pay current liabilities.

3. Production Cycle : The length or duration or production process also affects working capital requirement. Where production takes longer time, More working capital is required because more funds are needed for raw material, labour and other expenses. On the other hand, smaller production cycle need less working capital.

4. Turnover of Working Capital: Turnover implies the speed with which the working capital circulates in business. The rate of turnover of working capital is measured by the ratio of sales to current assets. More rapid is the flow of working capital, lesser is the need for working capital.

Question 4.
What is the meaning of financial management ? Give one definition of it. Write the main objectives of it.
Answer:
Meaning : Financial management is a functional activity of business management and it is a part of management. Financial management is responsible for the financial activities of a business. This is a group which deals with the finance, decision-making and formulating policies for the finance related activities of an enterprise. Financial management represents the wider interests of an enterprise and in this sense it is a watchdog of the enterprise. Financial management maintains coordination between sources of finance and their uses so that optimum utilization of the available finance could be made. Financial management includes cash flow, budget, credit, profit and loss, income etc.
Definitions : Different experts have defined financial management as under:

1. E.F.L. Breach says, “Financial management is that aspect of management which makes optimum and effective utilization of financial resources.”
According to a narrow view, the immediate objectives of financial management are to arrange for a suitable system for the organization’s liquidity, and profitability. But in a wider perspective, the objectives of financial management are to arrange for maximum financial facilities for the enterprise so that owners of the enterprise get the maximum benefit. Thus, main objectives of financial management have been proposed as under :

I. Profit Maximization : Traditionally, business is considered to be a profit-earning entity and profit has been considered to be the basis of measuring the efficiency and standard of an enterprise. Therefore, the primary objective every business is to earn the maximum profit. No limit has been demarcated as to what is ‘maximum profit’. Therefore, the following points should be kept in mind :

  1. Profit should be rational and justified;
  2. Social welfare should be kept in mind while earning profit;
  3. There should be a standard or decisive policy for earning profit;
  4. The profit earned should be used for social welfare also;
  5. Higher profit is a motivating factor for better business.

II. Maximization of wealth : It is a novel concept that value of wealth be maximized instead of maximizing profit. This will ensure growth of the business thereby benefiting the shareholders, managers, employees etc. With the increase in the value of the wealth of an enterprise, it will enjoy goodwill and will be stronger. Therefore, the objective of financial management should be to maximize the value of wealth.

III. Mobilizing adequate finance at minimum cost: The main objective of financial management is to arrange finance at minimum cost for the business because if cost increases than profit margin will reduce in business.

IV. Maximum rate of return : The objective of financial management is to get maxi¬mum returns on the invested capital so that shareholders can get maximum dividend and more interest can be given on debentures and apart from that various allowances can be given to employees.

Question 5.
What are the steps involves in trading procedure ?
Answer:
The Trading procedure involves the following steps :

1. Selection of a broker : The buying and selling of securities can only be done through SEBI registered brokers who are members of the Stock Exchange. The broker can be an individual, partnership firms or corporate bodies. So the first step is to select a broker who will buy/sell securities on behalf of the investor or speculator.

2. Opening D’mat Account with Depository : D’ mat (Dermaterialized) account refer to an account which an Indian citizen must open with the depository participant (banks or stock brokers) to trade in listed securities in electronic form. Second step in trading procedure is to open a D’mat account.

The securities are held in the electronic form by a depository. Depository is an institution or an organization which holds securities (e.g., Shares, Debentures, Bonds, Mutual Funds etc.). At present in India there are two depositories : NSDL (National securities Depository Ltd.) and CDSL (Central Depository Services Ltd.). There is no direct contact between depository and investor. Depository interacts with investors through depository participants only.
Depository participant will maintain securities account balances of investor and intimate investor about the status of their holdings from time to time.

3. Placing the Order : After opening the D’mat Account, the investor can place the order. The order can be placed to the broker either (DP) personally or through phone, email, etc. Investor must place the order very clearly specifying the range of price at which securities can be bought or sold, e.g., “Buy 100 equity shares of Reliance for not more than Rs 500 per share.

4. Executing the Order : As per the Instructions of the investor, the broker executes the order, i.e., he buys or sells the securities. Broker prepares a contract note for the order executed. The contract note contains the name and the price of securities, name of parties and brokerage (commission) charged by him. Contract note is signed by the broker.

5. Settlement: This means actual transfer of securities. This is the last stage in the trading of securities done by the broker on behalf of their clients. There can be two types of settlement.

(a) On the spot settlement : It means settlement is done immediately and on spot settlement follows. T + 2 rolling settlement’ This means any trade taking place on Monday gets settled by Wednesday :

(b) Forward settlement: It means settlement will take place on some future date. It can be T 5 or T + 7 etc. All trading in stock exchanges takes place between 9-55 am. and 3-30 pm. Monday to Friday.

Question 6.
Explain the various documents or instruments of money market.
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 6
1. Treasury BUI: Treasury Bill: A Treasury bill is basically an instrument  on mg by the Government of India maturing in less than one year. They are also known as Zero Coupon Bonds issued by the Reserve Bank of India on behalf of the Central Government to meet its short-term requirement of funds. Treasury bills are issued in the form of a promissory note. They are highly liquid and have assured yield and negligible risk of default. They are issued at a price which is lower than their face value and repaid at par. The difference between the price at which the treasury bills are issued and their redemption value is the interest receivable on them and is called discount.

Treasury bills are available for a minimum amount of Rs 25,000 and in multiples therefore. Example: Suppose an investor purchases a 91 days Treasury bill with a face value of Rs. 1,00,000 for Rs. 96,000. By holding the bill until the maturity date, the investor receives Rs. 1,00,000. The difference of Rs. 4,000 between the proceeds received at maturity and the amount paid to purchase the bill represents the interest received by him. ,

2. Commercial paper: Commercial paper is a short-term unsecured promissory note, negotiable and transferable by endorsement and delivery with a fixed maturity period. It is issued by large and creditworthy companies to raise short-term funds at lower rates of interest than market rates. It usually has a maturity period of 15 days to one year. The issuance of commercial paper is an alternative to bank borrowing for large companies that are generally considered to be financially strong. It is sold at a discount and redeemed at par. The original purpose of commercial paper was to provide short-terms funds for seasonal and working capital needs.

For example, companies use this instrument for purposes such as bridge financing. Example : Suppose a company needs long-term finance to buy some machinery. In order to raise the long term funds in the capital market the company will have to incur flotation costs (costs associated with floating of an issue are brokerage, commission, printing of applications and advertising etc.). Funds raised through commercial paper are used to meet the flotation costs. This is known as Bridge Financing.

3. Call money : Call money is short term finance repayable on demand, with a maturity period of one day to fifteen days, used for inter-bank transactions. Commercial banks have to maintain a minimum cash balance known as cash reserve ratio. The Reserve Bank of India changes the cash reserve ratio from time to time which in turn affects the amount of funds available to be given as loans by commercial banks. Call money is a method by which banks borrow from each other to be able to maintain the cash reserve ratio. The interest rate paid on call money loans is known as the call rate. It is a highly volatile rate that varies from day-to-day and sometimes even from hour-to-hour.

There is an inverse relationship between call rates and other short-term money market instruments such as certificates of deposit and commercial paper. A rise in call money rates makes other sources of finance such as commercial paper and certificates of deposit cheaper in comparison for banks raise funds from these sources.

4. Certificate of deposit:Certificate of deposit: Certificates of deposit (CD) are unsecured, negotiable, short-term instruments in bearer form, issued by commercial banks and development financial institutions. They can be issued to individuals, corporations and companies during periods of tight liquidity when the deposit growth of banks is slow but the demand for credit is high. They help to mobilize a large amount of money for short periods.

5. Commercial bill : A commercial bill is a bill of exchange used to finance the working capital requirements of business firms. It is a short-term, negotiable, self-liquidating instrument-which is used to finance the credit sales of firms. When goods are sold on credit, the buyer becomes liable to make payment on a specific date in future. The seller could wait till the specified date or make use of a bill of exchange. The seller (drawer) of the goods draws the bill and the buyer (drawer) accepts it.

On being accepted, the bill becomes a marketable instrument and is called a trade bill. These bills can be discounted with a bank if the seller needs funds before the bill matures. When a trade bill is accepted by a commercial bank, it is known as a commercial bill.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Write the objectives and functions of SEBI.
Answer:
Objectives : The objectives of the establishment of SEBI are as follows:

  1. The main objective of SEBI is to provide security to the investors.
  2. To attract the savings of the people to the capital market.
  3. To keep an eye on activities of the brokers in order to control the capital market.
  4. To promote development of securities market.
  5. To provide efficient services to all the parties operating in the capital market.

Functions of SEBI: The functions of SEBI are as follows :

  1. To protect the interests of investors in the security market and to properly develops the security market.
  2. To regulate the business being done in the security market.
  3. To check the function of stock brokers, share transfer agents, trustees, sub-brokers etc. and register them.
  4. To register and regulate investment schemes like mutual food.
  5. To carry on research work related with security market.
  6. To restrict and prohibit unfair and fraudster of trade practises related with security market.
  7. To promote and control self regulatory organization.
  8. To provide education to the investors related with securities.
  9. To check insiders trading in securities.

Question 8.
Differentiate between money market and capital market.
Answer;
Differences between Money Market and Capital Market:
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 3
Question 9.
What are the factors affecting fixed capital ?
Answer:
The various factors affecting fixed capital are :

1. Nature of industry : Fixed capital requirement largely depends on the nature of industry. When there is a need of land, building, machinery etc. in industry, the need of capital increases.

2. Nature of production : The requirement of fixed capital also depends on the nature of production, whether it is capital based or labour based.

3. Scope of business : If business is only a buyer or only a seller the capital requirement is less and if it is both the capital needed is comparatively more.

4. Expansion of business : If business is to be expanded in future then fixed capital is required in great sum. Due to modem machines and management the expenses increases. So capital requirement increases.

5. Preliminary expenses : The need of fixed capital will increase if the promoters at the time of establishment of company speed more on salary of promoters, establishment expenses, purchase of patent etc.

6. Attitude of management: If the manger wants to enter in the market as a major producer from. The very beginning than more fixed capital will be needed.

Question 10.
Describe the establishment, objects and advantages of Unit Trust of
India (UTI)
Answer:
Unit Trust of India (UTI):
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 10 Finance Market image - 4
The basic idea underlying the creation of the unit trust, as with similar trusts in other [ countries is to afford the small savers, a means of acquiring a share in the widening prosperity
based on steady industrial growth of the country through providing facilities for investment j which combines the benefit of wide diversification, a reasonable return and expert services I of management talent. The trust commenced its operations with affect from July, 1964.
Objectives of UTI

(i) It mobilizes savings of the community and channelizes them into productive investment. By promising savers triple benefits of safety, liquidity and profitability of investments, the trust encourages individual savings.

(ii) It gives everyone a chance to indirectly own shares and debentures in a large number of select companies and thus enables the investor to share in the widening prosperity of industrial growth.

Management

The trust is managed by a board of trustees consisting of 11 persons including some of the distinguished men in finance and business. The chairman of the board is appointed by the central Govt, in consultation with IDBI. The executive trustee and four other members : are appointed by IDBI. The remaining members are appointed by Reserve bank of India,Life Insurance Corporation and Commercial Banks.

Performance of Unit Trust in the Field of Investment of Funds

Investment of funds constitutes another aspect of operations of UTI. During the past 33 years of its life, the trust has been able to build up sizeable funds. As on 30th June, 1984 aggregating Rs. 1261-33 crores is collected. During the year 1983-84, the investable funds recorded funds recorded a marked rise of Rs. 391 -09 crore.

The cardinal feature of the trust’s investment activity has been to build a balanced flexible investment portfolio composed of corporate securities, Govt, securities and other investments representing fixed deposits with companies, advance deposits for shares and debentures, bridging finance, application money and money at call and short notice so as to ensure reasonable return with safety of capital and capital appreciation.

Units are gaining popularity because they are highly liquid in the sense that an investor can sell them whenever he wants.
Uses of resource : The fund of UTI has been invested in so many ways.
The percentage of investment is as follows :

  1. On shares and debentures of companies 55%
  2. On fixed deposits and other deposits in the bank 45%

MP Board Solutions

Question 11
What is the functions of finance management ?
Answer:
Finance is required in every field like business, industry, commerce, professional service etc. All persons working in these fields need knowledge of financial management. In each field, the person who manages and plans the financial resources is called the finance manager. A finance manager performs the following functions :

(A) Administrative Functions : All these functions relate to decision-making and the finance manager has to perform all these functions as the general functions. These are :

  1. To make prior financial estimates;
  2. To make financial planning;
  3. To organize the financial activities;
  4. To maintain coordination between different departments.

(B) Executive Functions: “The finance manager performs certain executive functions which are as under:

1. Arrange/Organize Finance: A finance manager has to find and arrange the various sources of finance required for the enterprise sd that, on the basis of the finance available, the operations of the enterprise may be carried on.

2. Allotment of Available Funds : The funds available with the finance manager are meant for requirements of the entire enterprise. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the finance manager to allot funds as and where needed in the enterprise.

3. Management of Assets : Under these are covered activities like purchase of current and fixed assets, arrangements for their safety, maintenance etc. Which are carried on under the instructions of the finance manager. The finance manager has also to consider, before allotting funds, the use and justification for the funds in different departments.

4. To Organize Expenditure : The finance manager should prepare budget estimates for expenditure required in the entire enterprise and invest the same in a planned manner. For this, the finance manager has to consider the expenditure on pay, interest, taxes, development activities etc.

5. Profit Planning : The finance manager makes proper planning for increasing the profits. He takes necessary steps to increase the profitability e.g., to fix proper prices, to control the costs, to control the expenditure, to exercise control on unproductive expenditure.

6. To Submit Reports: The finance managers submits various a few important reports from time to time which include report on availability of funds, monthly income and expenditure statement, position of balance of cash, a note indicating the financial position of the enterprise etc.

7. To Maintain Records : The finance manage has to prepare records of the various documents relating to finance and preserve them so that they may be used for future planning.

MP Board Class 12 Business Studies Important Questions

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण

In this article, we will share MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण Pdf, These solutions are solved subject experts from the latest edition books.

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण

बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण Important Questions

बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए –

प्रश्न (a)
पूर्ण प्रतिस्पर्धा बाजार की मुख्य विशेषता है –
(a) वस्तु की समान कीमत
(b) समरूप वस्तुएँ
(c) अत्यधिक क्रेता और विक्रेता
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।
उत्तर:
(d) उपर्युक्त सभी।

प्रश्न (b)
जिस बाजार में स्वतंत्र प्रवेश तथा बहिर्गमन हो, उसका नाम है –
(a) एकाधिकारात्मक प्रतियोगिता बाजार
(b) अपूर्ण प्रतियोगिता का बाजार
(c) पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता का बाजार
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता का बाजार

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न (c)
वस्तु की कीमत एवं माँग के बीच प्रतिलोम संबंध पाया जाता है –
(a) केवल एकाधिकार का
(b) केवल एकाधिकारी प्रतियोगिता
(c) और (b) दोनों में
(d) केवल पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता।
उत्तर:
(c) और (b) दोनों में

प्रश्न (d)
निम्नलिखित में से किसके अनुसार, “किसी वस्तु की कीमत, माँग और पूर्ति की शक्तियों द्वारा निर्धारित होती है” –
(a) जेवन्स
(b) वालरस
(c) मार्शल
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(c) मार्शल

प्रश्न (e)
एकाधिकार फर्म के संतुलन की शर्त नहीं है –
(a) औसत आय = सीमांत आगम
(b) सीमांत आय = सीमांत लागत
(c) सीमान्त लागत वक्र सीमांत आय वक्र को नीचे से काटे
(d) (b) एवं (c) दोनों।
उत्तर:
(a) औसत आय = सीमांत आगम

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न (f)
बाजार मूल्य पाया जाता है –
(a) अल्पकालीन बाजार में
(b) दीर्घकालीन बाजार में
(c) अति दीर्घकालीन बाजार में
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(a) अल्पकालीन बाजार में

प्रश्न (g)
एक फर्म का माँग वक्र पूर्ण लोचदार होता है –
(a) पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता
(b) एकाधिकार
(c) एकाधिकारी प्रतियोगिता
(d) अल्पाधिकार।
उत्तर:
(a) पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता

प्रश्न 2.
रिक्त स्थानों की पूर्ति कीजिए –

  1. जिस कीमत पर माँग एवं पूर्ति बराबर होते हैं, उसे ……………………………. कीमत कहते हैं।
  2. कीमत विभेद की सम्भावना …………………………………. बाजार में उत्पन्न होती है।
  3. एक अतिरिक्त इकाई का विक्रय करने पर कुल आगम में वृद्धि को …………………………….. कहते हैं।
  4. यदि किसी वस्तु की आपूर्ति अपरिवर्तित रहती है तो माँग में वृद्धि होने पर उस वस्तु की साम्य कीमत …………………………. जायेगी।
  5. पूर्ण प्रतियोगी बाजार में एक फर्म …………………….. होती है।
  6. कीमत सीलिंग ………………………… द्वारा किया जाता है।
  7. ……………………….. काल में माँग की शक्ति प्रभावशाली होती है।
  8. दो से अधिक फर्म का होना ……………………………. बाजार में आवश्यक है।
  9. फर्मों के समूह को ………………………………. कहते हैं।
  10. पेट्रोल का बाजार …………………………….. होता है।

उत्तर:

  1. सामान्य
  2. एकाधिकारी
  3. सीमान्त आगम
  4. बढ़
  5. कीमत स्वीकारक
  6. सरकार
  7. अल्प
  8. अल्पाधिकार
  9. उद्योग
  10. अंतर्राष्ट्रीय।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 3.
सत्य/असत्य का चयन कीजिए –

  1. ईटों का बाजार प्रादेशिक होता है।
  2. सामान्य मूल्य काल्पनिक होता है।
  3. अपूर्ण प्रतियोगिता एक व्यावहारिक दशा है।
  4. माँग तथा पूर्ति की शक्तियाँ लम्बी अवधि तक स्थायी साम्य की अवस्था में रहती हैं।
  5. माँग तथा पूर्ति दोनों में से किसी एक शक्ति द्वारा किसी वस्तु का मूल्य निर्धारित होता है।
  6. पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में फर्म स्वयं मूल्य निर्धारित करती है।
  7. एकाधिकृत प्रतियोगिता का माँग वक्र अनिश्चित होता है।

उत्तर:

  1. असत्य
  2. सत्य
  3. सत्य
  4. असत्य
  5. असत्य
  6. असत्य
  7. सत्य।

प्रश्न 4.
सही जोड़ी बनाइए –
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 1
उत्तर:

  1. (c)
  2. (a)
  3. (e)
  4. (d)
  5. (b).

प्रश्न 5.
एक शब्द/वाक्य में उत्तर दीजिए –

  1. टमाटर का बाजार मुख्य रूप से किस प्रकार का बाजार होता है?
  2. बाजार मूल्य किसके चारों ओर घमता है?
  3. दीर्घकाल में पूर्ण प्रतियोगी फर्म को कौन – सा लाभ प्राप्त होता है?
  4. कीमत निर्धारण में समय तत्व का महत्व किस अर्थशास्त्री ने बताया था?
  5. असामान्य लाभ या हानि किस प्रतियोगिता में होती है?
  6. व्यावहारिक जगत में किस प्रतियोगिता की स्थिति नहीं पाई जाती है?

उत्तर:

  1. अति अल्पकालीन
  2. सामान्य मूल्य
  3. सामान्य लाभ
  4. प्रो. मार्शल ने
  5. अपूर्ण प्रतियोगिता,
  6. पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की स्थिति।

बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण लघु उत्तरोष प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
बाजार मूल्य तथा सामान्य मूल्य में अन्तर स्पष्ट कीजिए?
उत्तर:
बाजार मूल्य तथा सामान्य मूल्य में अन्तर –

बाजार मूल्य:

  1. सामान्य मूल्य बाजार मूल्य अल्पकालीन मूल्य होता है। सामान्य मूल्य दीर्घकालीन मूल्य होता है।
  2. बाजार मूल्य वास्तविक मूल्य होता है। सामान्य मूल्य एक काल्पनिक मूल्य होता है।
  3. बाजार मूल्य का निर्धारण माँग एवं पूर्ति के अस्थायी संतुलन द्वारा होता है।
  4. बाजार मूल्य के निर्धारण में पूर्ति की अपेक्षा माँग सामान्य मूल्य के निर्धारण में माँग की अपेक्षा अधिक प्रभावी होती है।
  5. बाजार मूल्य पुनरुत्पादनीय तथा गैरपुनरुत्पादनीय दोनों ही प्रकार की वस्तुओं का होता है।

सामान्य मूल्य:

  1. सामान्य मूल्य दीर्घकालीन मूल्य होता है।
  2. सामान्य मूल्य एक काल्पनिक मूल्य होता है।
  3. सामान्य मूल्य का निर्धारण माँग और पूर्ति के अस्थायी संतुलन द्वारा होता है।
  4. पूर्ति अधिक प्रभावशाली होती है।
  5. सामान्य मूल्य केवल पुनरुत्पादनीय वस्तुओं का ही होता है गैर – पुनरुत्पादनीय वस्तुओं का नहीं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.
बाजार मूल्य की विशेषताएँ लिखिए?
उत्तर:
बाजार मूल्य की प्रमुख विशेषताएँ हैं –

  1. बाजार मूल्य एक अल्पकालीन मूल्य होता है। यह किसी समय माँग और पूर्ति के अस्थायी संतुलन द्वारा निर्धारित होता है।
  2. बाजार मूल्य वह मूल्य होता है जिस पर वास्तव में बाजार में वस्तु खरीदी एवं बेची जाती है।
  3. बाजार मूल्य सदैव सामान्य मूल्य के इर्द – गिर्द चक्कर लगाता रहता है। यह अधिक समय तक सामान्य मूल्य से बहुत ऊँचा या नीचा नहीं रह सकता।
  4. बाजार मूल्य सभी प्रकार की वस्तुओं का होता है चाहे वे निरुत्पादनीय हों अथवा पुनरुत्पादनीय।
  5. बाजार मूल्य के निर्धारण में पूर्ति की अपेक्षा माँग अधिक प्रभावशाली होती है। जब माँग बढ़ती है तो बाजार मूल्य भी बढ़ जाता है और जब माँग घटती है तो बाजार मूल्य भी घट जाता है।

प्रश्न 3.
सामान्य मूल्य की विशेषताएँ लिखिए?
उत्तर:
सामान्य मूल्य की प्रमुख विशेषताएँ निम्नांकित हैं –

  1. सामान्य मूल्य दीर्घकालीन मूल्य होता है। अत: सामान्य मूल्य माँग और पूर्ति के स्थायी संतुलन द्वारा निर्धारित होता है।
  2. सामान्य मूल्य उत्पादन व्यय के बराबर होता है। यह उत्पादन व्यय से बहुत ऊँचा या नीचा स्थायी रूप से नहीं रह सकता।
  3. सामान्य मूल्य एक स्थायी मूल्य होता है, क्योंकि यह माँग तथा पूर्ति की स्थायी शक्तियों द्वारा निर्धारित होता है।
  4. सामान्य मूल्य उन्हीं वस्तुओं का होता है, जिन्हें पुनः उत्पन्न किया जा सकता है। वहीं दूसरी ओर जिन वस्तुओं को पुन: उत्पन्न नहीं किया जा सकता, उनका सामान्य मूल्य नहीं होता।
  5. सामान्य मूल्य के निर्धारण में माँग की अपेक्षा पूर्ति का अधिक प्रभाव पड़ता है।

प्रश्न 4.
एक वस्तु का बाजार संतुलन में है, यदि कीमत –

  1. संतुलन कीमत से अधिक और
  2. संतुलन कीमत से कम होगी तो बाजार में क्या प्रतिक्रियाएँ होंगी? समझाइए?

उत्तर:

1. यदि बाजार कीमत संतुलन कीमत से अधिक हो:
इस दशा में बाजार माँग, बाजार पूर्ति से कम होगी अतः पूर्ति की अधिकता की स्थिति निर्मित हो जाएगी। प्रतिस्पर्धा विक्रेताओं में बढ़ेगी जिसके कारण विक्रेता कम कीमत भी स्वीकार कर लेगा। कीमत कम होने से माँग बढ़ जाएगी एवं पूर्ति संकुचित हो जाएगी। ऐसा होने से बाजार कीमत संतुलन कीमत के बराबर आ जाएगी।

2. यदि बाजार कीमत संतुलन कीमत से कम हो:
इस परिस्थिति में बाजार माँग, पूर्ति से अधिक हो जाएगी तथा माँग की अधिकता हो जाएगी। इसके कारण क्रेताओं में प्रतिस्पर्धा बढ़ेगी। इस प्रतिस्पर्धा के कारण क्रेता अधिक मूल्य देने को तैयार हो जाते हैं। इस मूल्य का प्रभाव यह पड़ता है कि माँग कम या संकुचित हो जाती है तथा पूर्ति का विस्तार हो जाता है यह तब तक होता है जब तक कि बाजार कीमत, संतुलन कीमत के बराबर न आ जाए। इन दोनों परिस्थितियों को निम्न चित्रों की सहायता से अधिक स्पष्ट किया जा सकता है
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 2
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 3

प्रश्न 5.
पूर्ति में परिवर्तन का संतुलन मूल्य पर क्या प्रभाव पड़ता है? रेखाचित्र द्वारा समझाइए?
उत्तर:
माँग स्थिर रहने पर पूर्ति में परिवर्तन का मूल्य पर Y प्रभाव पड़ना आवश्यक है। पूर्ति परिवर्तन की दो स्थितियाँ हो सकती हैं –

1. पूर्ति में वृद्धि का प्रभाव:
यदि किसी वस्तु की पूर्ति में वृद्धि होती है तो उसका पूर्ति वक्र बायीं ओर खिसकेगा। पूर्ति वृद्धि का आशय है कि उसके उत्पादक एवं विक्रेता वस्तु के निश्चित मूल्य पर उसकी अधिक मात्रा उत्पादित करने एवं विक्रय करने को तत्पर रहेंगे।

रेखाचित्र के आधार पर DD माँग रेखा और SS पूर्ति वक्र के मध्य E बिन्दु संतुलन बिन्दु है। इस आधार पर OQ वस्तु की मात्रा का निर्धारण होता है। अब पूर्ति में वृद्धि के कारण पूर्ति वक्र दायीं तरफ खिसक कर S1S1, हो जाता है । इस नये S1S1, वक्र DD माँग वक्र का E सन्तुलन होता है। अत: मात्रा बढ़कर OQ1, हो जाता है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 4

2. पूर्ति में कमी का प्रभाव:
यदि किसी वस्तु की पूर्ति कम होती है, तो इसका आशय यह है कि उसके उत्पादक एवं विक्रेता वस्तु के निश्चित मूल्य पर उसकी कम मात्रा ही उत्पादित करने एवं विक्रय को तैयार होंगे। रेखाचित्र द्वारा DD रेखा माँग रेखा तथा SS रेखा पूर्ति रेखा है। E बिन्दु सन्तुलन बिन्दु है। यदि पूर्ति में कमी होती है तो पूर्ति रेखा बायीं ओर खिसक कर S1S1, हो जाता है और नयी सन्तुलन बिन्दु E1, प्राप्त होता है। अतः सन्तुलन मूल्य बढ़कर OP1, हो जाती है और सन्तुलन मात्रा घटकर OQ1 हो जाता है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 5

प्रश्न 6.
जब एक वस्तु का संतुलन मूल्य उसके बाजार मूल्य से कम हो जाता है तो विक्रेताओं में प्रतिस्पर्धा होगी? इस कथन के संदर्भ में कारण सहित उत्तर दीजिए?
उत्तर:
उक्त कथन सही है क्योंकि जब संतुलन मूल्य, बाजार मूल्य से कम होता है तो बाजार पूर्ति अधिक एवं बाजार माँग कम हो जाती है। इससे पूर्ति की अधिकता उत्पन्न होती है। दूसरे शब्दों में वस्तु के क्रेता कम एवं विक्रेता अधिक होते हैं इसके कारण विक्रेताओं में स्वाभाविक रूप से प्रतिस्पर्धा बढ़ जाती है।

प्रश्न 7.
एकाधिकारी प्रतिस्पर्धा में दीर्घकाल में किसी फर्म का संतुलन शून्य लाभ पर होने का क्या कारण है?
उत्तर:
एकाधिकारी प्रतिस्पर्धा बाजार में नए फर्मों का प्रवेश दीर्घकाल में निर्बाध रूप से होता है। यदि कोई उद्योग या फर्म अल्पकाल में धनात्मक अर्जित कर रही है तो इससे नवीन फर्मों का उद्योग में प्रवेश का आकर्षण बढ़ेगा ऐसा तब तक होगा जब तक लाभ शून्य न हो जाए। यदि अल्पकाल में ही फर्मों को हानि हो रही हो तो कुछ फर्मे या तो उत्पादन बंद कर देंगी या उद्योग को छोड़कर बाजार से बहिर्गमन कर जाएँगी। पूर्ति में कमी आ जाएगी एवं इसके कारण संतुलन मूल्य बढ़ेगा एवं ऐसा तब तक होगा जब तक लाभ शून्य की स्थिति में न आ जाए।

प्रश्न 8.
एक फर्म को मूल्य स्वीकारक फर्म कब कहा जाता है?
उत्तर:
एक फर्म को मूल्य स्वीकारक फर्म तभी माना जाएगा जब वस्तु की कीमत बाजार माँग और बाजार पर्ति की शक्तियों द्वारा निर्धारित होती है और फर्मों द्वारा इस मूल्य पर कितनी भी वस्तुओं का विक्रय किया जा सकता है एवं कोई भी फर्म कीमत को प्रभावित नहीं कर सकती है। इसके कारण हैं –

  1. विक्रेताओं एवं क्रेताओं की बड़ी संख्या जो बाजार की पूर्ति को प्रभावित नहीं कर सकते।
  2. वस्तुएँ समरूप होती हैं। इसलिए कोई भी फर्म प्रचलित मूल्य से अधिक मूल्य वसूल करेगी तो क्रेता एक फर्म को छोड़कर दूसरे फर्म की ओर चले जाएँगे।
  3. क्रेता एवं विक्रेता को बाजार का पूर्ण ज्ञान होता है। अतः प्रत्येक फर्म मूल्य स्वीकारक होती है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 9.
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में फर्मों के स्वतंत्र प्रवेश एवं बहिर्गमन का क्या प्रभाव होता है? समझाइए?
उत्तर:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में प्रत्येक फर्म स्वतंत्रतापूर्वक उद्योग में प्रवेश कर सकती है एवं इच्छानुसार बहिर्गमन कर सकती है। जब फर्मे अधिलाभ अर्जित करती हैं तो नई फर्मे लाभ की आशा में उद्योग में प्रवेश करेंगी एवं इससे बाजार की पूर्ति में वृद्धि हो जाएगी। इससे वस्तु की बाजार कीमत कम हो जाएगी, लाभ कम हो जाएगा एवं फर्मे उद्योग को छोड़कर जाने लगेंगी। जब सामान्य हानि की दशा रहेगी तो फर्ने उद्योग को छोड़कर जाने लगेंगी परिणामस्वरूप बाजार की पूर्ति में कमी आ जाएगी। बाजार की पूर्ति कम होने से बाजार मूल्य बढ़ जाएगा एवं सामान्य हानि समाप्त होने लगेगी।

प्रश्न 10.
एक कीमत – स्वीकारक फर्म की बाजार कीमत तथा सीमान्त सम्प्राप्ति में क्या संबंध है?
उत्तर:
एक इकाई के कम या अधिक उत्पादन करने से। कुल सम्प्राप्ति में जो परिवर्तन आता है। उसे सीमान्त सम्प्राप्ति। कहते हैं। सूत्र –
MR = TRN – TRN – 1

एक कीमत स्वीकारक फर्म बाजार कीमत को ही स्वीकार करती है। अत: उसके लिए औसत सम्प्राप्ति, सीमान्त सम्प्राप्ति की तथा बाजार कीमत तीनों बराबर होते हैं। एक कीमत स्वीकारक फर्म के लिए सभी सीमान्त सम्प्राप्तियों को जोड़कर कुल सम्प्राप्ति – उत्पादन की गणना की जा सकती है।

प्रश्न 11.
किसी आगत की कीमत में वृद्धि एक फर्म के पूर्ति वक्र को किस प्रकार प्रभावित करती है?
उत्तर:
जब उत्पादन की एक आगत की कीमत (जैसे – भूमि की लगान दर) में वृद्धि होती है, तो इसके परिणामस्वरूप निर्गत की उत्पादन लागत में भी वृद्धि होती है। जिससे निर्गत के किसी भी स्तर पर फर्म की औसत लागत तथा सीमान्त लागत में भी वृद्धि हो जाती है। सीमान्त लागत वक्र ऊपर/बायीं ओर खिसक जाता है। अतः साधनों की कीमत/लागत बढ़ने से आपूर्ति वक्र ऊपर/बायीं ओर खिसक जाता है।

प्रश्न 12.
मूल्य निर्धारण में समय तत्व के महत्व की व्याख्या कीजिये?
उत्तर:
किसी भी वस्तु के मूल्य निर्धारण में समय तत्व का विशेष महत्व होता है। वस्तु का मूल्य हमेशा माँग और पूर्ति की सापेक्षिक शक्तियों के द्वारा निर्धारित होता है। बाजार में माँग और पूर्ति की सापेक्षिक शक्तियों के बीच रस्साकशी होती है। कभी माँग, पूर्ति से ज्यादा हो जाती है तो कभी पूर्ति, माँग से ज्यादा हो जाती है किन्तु इन दोनों शक्तियों को पूर्ण संतुलन बिन्दु तक पहुँचने में समय लगता है। तब तक बाजार में अस्थायी साम्य बना रहता है। वस्तु के मूल्य निर्धारण में समय तत्व का प्रभाव निम्न प्रकार पड़ता है –

1. अति अल्पकाल:
यह वह समयावधि होती है जब वस्तु की पूर्ति स्थिर रहती है। यदि माँग बढ़ जाती है तो वस्तु का मूल्य बढ़ जायेगा एवं माँग घट जाती है तो मूल्य घट जायेगा। इसका कारण यह है कि मूल्य पर माँग का ही प्रभाव अधिक एवं पूर्ति का प्रभाव कम देखने में आता है। माँग अनुसार पूर्ति समायोजित नहीं की जा सकती।

2. अल्पकाल:
इस समयावधि में भी वस्तु की पूर्ति लगभग स्थिर रहती है। इसमें स्टॉक में रखी गई मात्रा तक ही माँग को पूरा किया जा सकता है। इस काल में भी मूल्य पर माँग का ही प्रभाव अधिक देखने में आता है। यहाँ भी माँग के अनुसार पूर्ति को पूर्णतः समायोजित नहीं किया जा सकता है।

3. दीर्घकाल:
यह वह समयावधि होती है जिसमें वस्तु की कीमत पर पूर्ति का प्रभाव अधिक पड़ता है। समय इतना अधिक होता है कि माँग के अनुसार पूर्ति को समायोजित किया जा सकता है।

4. अति दीर्घकाल:
यह वह समयावधि है जिसमें न केवल उत्पादकों को माँग के अनुसार पूर्ति को समायोजित करने का पूरा समय मिल जाता है, यहाँ तक पूर्ति पक्ष में उत्पादन की मात्रा, तकनीक, संयंत्र के आकार – प्रकार एवं माँग पक्ष में जनसंख्या, रुचि, फैशन, आय आदि में परिवर्तन दिखाई देता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 13.
मान.लीजिए, एक पूर्ण प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में वस्तुx की माँग तथा पूर्ति वक्र निम्न प्रकार दिये गये हैं –
qD = 700 – P
qS = 500 + 3p क्योंकि p ≥ 15
= 0 क्योंकि 0 ≤ p < 15
मान लीजिए कि बाजार में समरूपी फर्मे हैं। ₹15 से कम किसी भी कीमत पर वस्तु x की बाजार पूर्ति के शून्य होने के कारण की पहचान कीजिए। इस वस्तु के लिए सन्तुलन कीमत क्या होगी? संतुलन की स्थिति में x की कितनी मात्रा का उत्पादन होगा?
उत्तर:
माना कि बाजार में समरूपी फर्मों की संख्या स्थिर है, तब दिया है –
qD = 700 – p
qS = 500 + 3 p के लिए p ≥ 15
qS = 0 के लिए p < 15
यहाँ qD = माँग, qS= पूर्ति, p = कीमत।
क्योंकि सन्तुलन कीमत पर बाजार रिक्त हो जाता है।
अतः हम बाजार माँग और बाजार पूर्ति को बराबर करके संतुलन कीमत निम्न प्रकार ज्ञात कर सकते हैं –
qD = qS
700 – p = 500 + 3p
3P + P = 700 – 500
4P = 200
P = 50
अतः संतुलन कीमत = 50 प्रति इकाई।
अतः सन्तुलन की स्थिति में वस्तु x की मात्रा qD= 700 – 50 = 650
पूर्ति qS = 500 + 3(50) = 650
इस प्रकार सन्तुलन मात्रा 650 इकाई होगी तथा ₹ 5 से कम किसी भी कीमत पर फर्म उत्पादन नहीं करेगी क्योंकि उसे हानि उठानी पड़ेगी।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 14.
मान लीजिए कि नमक की माँग तथा पूर्ति वक्र को इस प्रकार दिया गया है?
qD = 1000 – p
qS = 700 + 2p

(a) संतुलन कीमत तथा मात्रा ज्ञात कीजिए।
(b) अब मान लीजिए कि नमक के उत्पादन के लिए प्रयुक्त एक आगत की कीमत में वृद्धि हो जाती है और नया पूर्ति वक्र है –

qS = 400 + 2p
सन्तुलन कीमत तथा मात्रा किस प्रकार परिवर्तित होती है? क्या परिवर्तन आपकी अपेक्षा के अनुकूल है?

(c) मान लीजिए, सरकार नमक की बिक्री पर ₹ 3 प्रति इकाई कर लगा देती है। यह संतुलन कीमत तथा मात्रा को किस प्रकार प्रभावित करेगा?
उत्तर:

(a) दिया है –

qD = 1000 – P
qS = 700 + 2 p
संतुलन कीमत की गणना निम्न प्रकार कर सकते हैं –
qD = qS
1000 – p = 700 + 2p
1000 – 700 = 2p + p
3p = 300
p= 100
अतः संतुलन कीमत = 100 होगी।
अब हम संतुलन मात्रा की गणना निम्न प्रकार कर सकते हैं –
qD = 1000 – 100 = 900
तथा
qS = 700 + 2 (100) = 900
अतः सन्तुलन मात्रा 900 किग्रा होगी।

(b) संतुलन वक्र में परिवर्तन होने पर –
qS = 400 + 2p
तथा
qD = 100 – p
संतुलन कीमत की गणना –
q = 1000 – p = 400 + 2p
qD = 100 – p
संतुलन कीमत की गणना –
qD = qS
= 1000 – p = 400 + 2p
= 1000 – 400 = 2p + p
3p = 600
p = 200
अतः संतुलन कीमत की गणना –
qD = 1000 – 200 = 800
qS = 400 + 2 (200) = 800.

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 15.
क्या प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में लाभ – अधिकतमीकरण फर्म, जिसकी बाजार कीमत सीमान्त लागत के बराबर नहीं है, उसका निर्गत का स्तर सकारात्मक हो सकता है? व्याख्या कीजिए?
उत्तर:
प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में लाभ अधिकतमीकरण फर्म जिसकी बाजार कीमत, सीमान्त लागत से कम या अधिक है अर्थात् बराबर नहीं है। उसका निर्गत स्तर सकारात्मक नहीं हो सकता है। निर्गत सतर के सकारात्मक होने के लिए प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में लाभ – अधिकतमीकरण फर्म की बाजार कीमत तथा सीमान्त लागत का बराबर होना आवश्यक है। प्रश्नानुसार, व्याख्या करने के लिए निर्गत स्तर के सकारात्मक न होने की दो स्थितियाँ हो सकती हैं –

  • बाजार कीमत सीमान्त लागत से अधिक होने पर, (MR > MC)
  • बाजार कीमत सीमान्त लागत से कम होने पर, (MR < MC)

इस रेखाचित्र में Y1, के उत्पादन स्तर पर उत्पादन किया जाता है। इससे कम उत्पादन करने का तात्पर्य होगा कि कीमत सीमान्त लागत से कम (MR < MC) है। जिसके फलस्वरूप फर्म को हानि होगी। इसलिए कोई भी फर्म ऐसा नहीं करेगी कि Y1, से कम उत्पादन करे। इसका तात्पर्य यह है कि फर्म सकारात्मक उत्पादन करने के लिए Y1 से अधिक उत्पादन को बढ़ाने का प्रयत्न करेगी। ऐसा करने पर यदि कीमत सीमान्त लागत से अधिक हो जाती है, (MR > MC) तो फर्म उत्पादन बढ़ाने का लाभ प्राप्त करेगी। फर्म अपने लाभ को अधिकतम करने के लिए तब तक उत्पादन बढ़ाएगी जब तक कीमत सीमान्त लागत के बराबर नहीं आ जाती है। (MR = MC)। चित्र में Y2 आ जाती है। (MR = MC)।

चित्र में Y2, उत्पादन के बाद भी उत्पादन बढ़ाना जारी रखती है, तो Y3 उत्पादन स्तर पर सीमान्त लागत कीमत से कम हो जाएगा अर्थात् MR < MC और फर्म के लाभ कम हो जाएँगे। इसलिए फर्म Y3, उत्पादन स्तर से पुन: Y2, उत्पादन के स्तर पर आएगी तथा E बिन्दु जो कि अधिकतम लाभ का बिन्दु है पर पहुँच जाएँगी। यही फर्म का सकारात्मक स्तर है। इस प्रकार से एक पूर्ण प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में फर्म Y2, स्तर से न कम और न ज्यादा उत्पादन करना चाहेगी। क्योंकि इस स्तर पर उसे अधिकतम लाभ मिल रहे हैं।

प्रश्न 16.
क्या एक प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में कोई लाभ – अधिकतमीकरण फर्म सकारात्मक निर्गत स्तर पर उत्पादन कर सकती है, जब सीमान्त लागत घट रही हो। व्याख्या कीजिए?
उत्तर:
प्रस्तुत रेखाचित्र से स्पष्ट है कि यदि फर्म निर्गत की q1, मात्रा का उत्पादन करती है, तो सीमान्त लागत, सीमान्त सम्प्राप्ति से अधिक होगी। जिससे फर्म को हानि Y उठानी पड़ेगी। फर्म उत्पादन मात्रा को तब तक बढ़ाएगी। जब तक MC = MR न हो जाए। बिन्दु B पर MC = MR है। फर्म का सकारात्मक निर्गत स्तर है। q1 से q2 निर्गत स्तरों के बीच सीमान्त लागत कम होती जा रही है। इसलिए इनके बीच का कोई भी निर्गत स्तर सकारात्मक निर्गत स्तर नहीं हो सकता है। अतः पूर्ण प्रतिस्पर्धी बाजार में कोई लाभ अधिकतमीकरण फर्म सकारात्मक निर्गत स्तर पर उत्पादन नहीं कर सकती है, जब सीमान्त लागत घट रही हो।

बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण दीर्घ उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की विशेषताएँ बताइये?
उत्तर:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की प्रमुख विशेषताएँ निम्नांकित हैं –

1. क्रेताओं और विक्रेताओं की बाजार में अधिक संख्या:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की सबसे पहली विशेषता यह है कि बाजार में क्रेताओं एवं विक्रेताओं की संख्या इतनी अधिक होनी चाहिए कि कोई भी क्रेता या विक्रेता अकेले वस्तु की कीमत को प्रभावित करने की दशा में न हो।

2. वस्तुओं का समरूप होना:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की दूसरी विशेषता यह है कि विभिन्न फर्मों द्वारा उत्पादित वस्तुओं में समरूपता का गुण होता है। उत्पादन में समरूपता होने के कारण विक्रेता बाजार में प्रचलित मूल्य से अधिक कीमत नहीं ले सकता।

3. फर्मों का स्वतंत्र प्रवेश तथा बहिर्गमन:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की तीसरी विशेषता यह है कि विभिन्न फर्मों को उद्योग में प्रवेश करने तथा उद्योग को छोड़ने की पूर्ण स्वतंत्रता होती है।

4. उत्पत्ति के साधनों में पूर्ण गतिशीलता:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में उत्पत्ति के साधनों को एक व्यवसाय को छोड़कर दूसरे व्यवसाय में जाने की पूरी स्वतंत्रता रहती है। इसलिए उत्पत्ति के साधन पूर्णरूपेण गतिशील होते है।

5. विक्रय एवं परिवहन लागतों का अभाव:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में सभी उत्पादक एवं क्रेता एक – दूसरे के इतने अधिक निकट होते हैं कि इनमें विक्रय एवं परिवहन लागतों का अभाव पाया जाता है।

प्रश्न 2.
संतुलन मूल्य का निर्धारण उदाहरण सहित समझाइए?
उत्तर:
संतुलन मूल्य:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में वस्तु की कीमत का निर्धारण माँग और पूर्ति की सापेक्षिक क्रियाओं के द्वारा होता है। माँग और पूर्ति की शक्तियाँ ही इस कीमत का निर्धारण करती हैं। जिस कीमत पर क्रेता, और विक्रेता दोनों संतुष्ट हो जाते हैं। यह मूल्य संतुलन मूल्य कहलाता है। इस कीमत पर वस्तु की माँग और पूर्ति दोनों बराबर होते हैं तथा बाजार साफ हो जाता है अर्थात् न तो कोई अतिरिक्त माँग होती है और न ही कोई अतिरिक्त पूर्ति।
तालिका – संतुलन – मूल्य वस्तु का मूल्य:

उपर्युक्त तालिका से स्पष्ट है कि जब कीमत ₹ 1 है तब माँग 500 और पूर्ति 100 किलोग्राम है अर्थात् माँग पूर्ति से अधिक है, अत: कीमत में बढ़ने की प्रवृत्ति होगी। कीमत बढ़ते – बढ़ते जब ₹ 3 पर पहुँचती है तब वस्तु की माँग और पूर्ति दोनों ही 300 किलोग्राम हो जाती है। यहीं पर संतुलन होगा। यदि कीमत ₹ 5 हो जाती है तो वस्तु की माँग 100 किलोग्राम तथा पूर्ति 500 किलोग्राम की होगी। इस स्थिति में माँग की तुलना में पूर्ति अधिक होगी, अतः कीमत में घटने की प्रवृत्ति प्रारंभ हो जायेगी और पुनः कीमत ₹ 3 पर जा पहुँचती है इस प्रकार उपर्युक्त तालिका के अनुसार माँग और पूर्ति में संतुलन ₹ 3 कीमत पर होता है, अतः कीमत ₹ 3 निर्धारित होती है चूँकि ₹ 3 की इस कीमत पर वस्तु की माँग और वस्तु की पूर्ति दोनों ही बराबर है अतः कीमत में परिवर्तन होने की कोई प्रवृत्ति नहीं होगी और संतुलन हो जायेगा!

प्रश्न 3.
बाजार मूल्य का अर्थ लिखिए। अति अल्पकाल के बाजार का मूल्य निर्धारण पर क्या प्रभाव पड़ता है? समझाइए?
उत्तर:
बाजार मूल्य का अर्थ:
बाजार मूल्य वह मूल्य होता है जिस पर अल्पकाल में माँग और पूर्ति के बीच अस्थायी संतुलन होता है। अल्पकाल से तात्पर्य, समय की उस अवधि से है जिनमें वस्तु की पूर्ति को उसकी माँगों के अनुसार समायोजित नहीं किया जा सकता है। बाजार मूल्य का निर्धारण वस्तु की माँग एवं पूर्ति के अस्थायी संतुलन द्वारा होता है। अल्पकाल में जिस मूल्य पर वस्तुओं का क्रय – विक्रय होता है, वही बाजार मूल्य कहलाता है।

MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 11
अति अल्पकाल में मूल्य – निर्धारण:
अति अल्पकाल वह अवधि होती है जिसमें कुल पूर्ति स्थिर रहती है। अति अल्पकाल में समय इतना कम होता है कि उत्पादन की मात्रा में परिवर्तन करना सम्भव नहीं होता। इस दृष्टि। से नाशवान वस्तुओं में अति अल्पकाल या बाजार अवधि प्रायः एक दिन तथा टिकाऊ वस्तुओं की बाजार अवधि कुछ दिन या कुछ सप्ताह होती है।

चित्र द्वारा स्पष्टीकरण:
प्रस्तुत रेखाचित्र में पूर्ति स्थिर होने के कारण पूर्ति रेखा SQ को एक खड़ी रेखा के रूप में प्रदर्शित किया गया है। OQ पूर्ति स्थिर है। माँग रेखा DD है। माँग तथा पूर्ति रेखा एक – दूसरे को P बिन्दु पर काट रही है। अत: वस्तु की कीमत PQ निर्धारित होती है। यदि माँग बढ़ाकर D1,D1, हो जाती है तो कीमत बढ़कर PQ हो जाती है। यदि माँग घटकर D2,D2, हो जाती है तो कीमत घटकर P1Q हो जाती है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 4.
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में मूल्य निर्धारण कैसे होता है? रेखाचित्र द्वारा स्पष्ट कीजिए?
अथवा
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में मूल्य निर्धारण को निम्नांकित बिन्दुओं के अन्तर्गत स्पष्ट कीजिए?

  1. वस्तु की माँग
  2. वस्तु की पूर्ति
  3. माँग व पूर्ति का संतुलन।

उत्तर:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में मूल्य निर्धारण:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में मूल्य निर्धारण किस प्रकार का होता है, इस संबंध में प्राचीन अर्थशास्त्रियों में काफी मतभेद रहा, मुख्यत: दो विचारधाराएँ प्रचलित थीं। एक विचार के समर्थक एडम स्मिथ, रिकार्डो आदि थे, जिनके अनुसार किसी वस्तु का मूल्य उसकी उत्पादन लागत द्वारा निर्धारित होता है। इसके विपरीत, दूसरी विचारधारा के समर्थकों वालरस, जेवेन्स आदि के अनुसार किसी वस्तु का मूल्य उसकी उत्पादन लागत पर नहीं बल्कि उसकी उपयोगिता अर्थात् सीमान्त उपयोगिता पर निर्भर करता है।

1. वस्तु की माँग:
किसी वस्तु की माँग उपभोक्ताओं द्वारा की जाती है। उपभोक्ता किसी वस्तु की माँग उस वस्तु में निहित उपयोगिता के कारण करता है। उपभोक्ता वस्तु का कितना मूल्य देगा, यह वस्तु की सीमान्त उपयोगिता पर निर्भर करता है। उपभोक्ता किसी भी दशा में वस्तु की सीमान्त उपयोगिता में अधिक मूल्य नहीं देगा। इस प्रकार उपभोक्ता के लिए वस्तु की सीमान्त उपयोगिता वस्तु के मूल्य की अधिकतम सीमा निर्धारित करती है।

2. वस्तु की पूर्ति:
किसी वस्तु की पूर्ति उत्पादकों द्वारा की जाती है। वस्तु के उत्पादन में चूँकि उत्पादकों को कुछ लागतें वहन करनी पड़ती हैं, इसलिए वह अपनी वस्तु का मूल्य कम से कम सीमान्त लागत के बराबर अवश्य प्राप्त करना चाहेंगे। इस प्रकार सीमान्त लागत किसी वस्तु के मूल्य की निम्नतम सीमा को बताती है।

3. माँग व पूर्ति का संतुलन:
उपभोक्ता वस्तु की कीमत उसकी सीमान्त उपयोगिता से अधिक नहीं देगा तथा उत्पादक वस्तु की कीमत उसकी सीमान्त लागत से कम नहीं लेगा। अतः वस्तु की कीमत इन दोनों सीमाओं के बीच में कहीं निर्धारित होगी। प्रत्येक क्रेता इस बात का प्रयास करता है कि उसे वस्तु की कम से कम कीमत चुकानी पड़े। प्रत्येक विक्रेता इस बात का प्रयास करता है कि वह वस्तु की अधिक से अधिक कीमत प्राप्त कर ले। ऐसी स्थिति में क्रेता एवं विक्रेता में – सौदेबाजी चलती रहती है तथा माँग एवं पूर्ति की शक्तियाँ एकदूसरे के विपरीत दिशा में कार्य करती हैं। अन्त में वस्तु की कीमत है| उस बिन्दु पर निर्धारित होती है, जहाँ पर कि वस्तु की माँगी जाने वाली मात्रा तथा वस्तु की पूर्ति मात्रा आपस में बराबर हो जाती है। इसी को साम्य मूल्य कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 12

चित्र द्वारा स्पष्टीकरण:
प्रस्तुत चित्र में OX आधार रेखा पर वस्तु की माँग व पूर्ति तथा OY लम्ब रेखा पर वस्तु की कीमत को प्रदर्शित किया गया है। चित्र में DD माँग वक्र तथा SS पूर्ति वक्र हैं । ये दोनों एक – दूसरे को E बिन्दु पर काटते हैं। यह साम्य बिन्दु है। इस बिन्दु पर मूल्य OP या OE होगा तथा मात्रा OQ होगी। इस प्रकार पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता के अन्तर्गत मूल्य का निर्धारण माँग व पूर्ति की सापेक्षिक शक्तियों द्वारा साम्य बिन्दु पर किया जाता है।

प्रश्न 5.
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता को परिभाषित कीजिए। क्या पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता काल्पनिक है?
अथवा
“पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता एक कोरी कल्पना है।” स्पष्ट कीजिये?
अथवा क्या पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता कल्पना मात्र है? मुख्य कारण बताइये?
उत्तर:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की परिभाषा:
श्रीमती जॉन रॉबिन्सन के अनुसार, “पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता तब पायी जाती है, जब प्रत्येक उत्पादक के उत्पादन के लिए माँग पूर्णतया लोचदार होती है। इसका अर्थ यह है कि प्रथम, विक्रेताओं की संख्या अधिक होती है जिससे किसी एक विक्रेता को उत्पादक का उत्पादन उस वस्तु के कुल उत्पादन का एक बहुत ही थोड़ा – सा भाग प्राप्त होता है तथा दूसरे सभी क्रेता प्रतियोगी विक्रेताओं के बीच चुनाव कराने की दृष्टि से समान होते हैं, जिससे कि बाजार पूर्ण हो जाता है।”

क्या पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता काल्पनिक है:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता बाजार की एक काल्पनिक दशा है, क्योंकि

1. क्रेताओं एवं विक्रेताओं का बड़ी संख्या में न होना:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता बाजार की एक ऐसी दशा है जिसमें क्रेताओं एवं विक्रेताओं की संख्या अधिक होती है, लेकिन व्यावहारिक जगत में यह बात सही नहीं है, क्योंकि कुछ वस्तुओं के उत्पादक सीमित होते हैं जबकि उपभोक्ताओं की संख्या अधिक होती है।”

2. वस्तु का समरूप न होना:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता के लिए यह आवश्यक शर्त है कि वस्तुएँ समरूप होनी चाहिए, लेकिन व्यवहार में ऐसा नहीं होता। प्राय: हम जिन वस्तुओं का उपभोग करते हैं वे सब वस्तुएँ आकारप्रकार तथा गुणों में एक – दूसरे के समान नहीं होती हैं।

3. फर्मों का स्वतंत्र प्रवेश तथा बहिर्गमन न होना:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता बाजार में यह शर्त रहती है कि कोई भी फर्म, उद्योग में प्रवेश कर सकती है तथा उद्योग से बहिर्गमन कर सकती हैं लेकिन व्यवहार में सरकारी हस्तक्षेप के कारण ऐसा नहीं होता है।

4. बाजार का पूर्ण ज्ञान न होना:
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता बाजार में यह शर्त रहती है कि क्रेताओं एवं विक्रेताओं में निकट का सम्पर्क होता है, लेकिन व्यावहारिक जगत में क्रेताओं एवं विक्रेताओं को इस बात की जानकारी नहीं रहती कि कौन – सी वस्तु कहाँ तथा किस कीमत में बेची या खरीदी जा सकती है।

5. उत्पत्ति के साधनों में पूर्ण गतिशीलता न होना:
उत्पत्ति के साधन पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता में पूर्ण गतिशील होते हैं, यह मान्यता भी गलत है।

6. परिवहन लागतों का शून्य होना संभव नहीं:
वस्तु को एक स्थान से दूसरे स्थान पर लाने ले जाने में परिवहन व्यय भी होते हैं। अतः परिवहन लागतों का शून्य होना संभव नहीं है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 6.
पूर्ण प्रतियोगिता की दशा में दीर्घकाल में किसी वस्तु का मूल्य कैसे निश्चित होता है? समझाइये?
उत्तर:
दीर्घकाल (Long Period) दीर्घकाल वह समयावधि है जिसमें उत्पादन के सभी साधन परिवर्तनशील होते हैं तथा जिनका माँग के अनुरूप ४ पूर्ति में समायोजन किया जा सकता है। इस समयावधि में अन्य फर्मे उद्योग में प्रवेश कर सकती हैं एवं वर्तमान फर्मे उद्योग से बहिर्गमन कर सकती हैं तथा सभी फर्मे अपने उत्पादन की क्षमता को आवश्यकतानुसार परिवर्तित कर सकती हैं। दीर्घकाल में वस्तु के मूल्य निर्धारण में उसके उत्पादन की लागत का सबसे महत्वपूर्ण भाग होता है। इस समयावधि में वस्तु का मूल्य उसकी औसत न्यूनतम लागत के बराबर होगा।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 13
रेखाचित्र द्वारा स्पष्टीकरण:
प्रस्तुत रेखाचित्र में उद्योग की माँग व पूर्ति की शक्तियाँ E वस्तु की मात्रा – साम्य बिन्दु पर OP कीमत का निर्धारण करती हैं तथा उद्योग में कुल OQ मात्रा तक वस्तुओं का क्रय – विक्रय किया जाता है। यही OP कीमत फ़र्म के द्वारा स्वीकार कर ली जाती है। यह कीमत दीर्घकालीन औसत लागत (LAC) तथा दीर्घकालीन सीमांत लागत (LMC) के बराबर है। फर्म का संतुलन P बिन्दु पर होता है। फर्म OK मात्रा बेचकर न्यूनतम औसत लागत OR पर उत्पादन करती है। फर्म को यहाँ सामान्य लाभ प्राप्त होता है। अर्थात् यहाँ P = LAC = LMC = LAR = LMR है। इस काल में कीमत, उत्पादन लागत पर निर्भर करेगी, जो स्वयं उत्पत्ति के नियमों पर आधारित है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 14

प्रश्न 7.
माँग में परिवर्तन का संतुलन मूल्य पर क्या प्रभाव पड़ता है? रेखाचित्र द्वारा समझाइए?
उत्तर:
वस्तु विशेष के मूल्य स्थिर रहने पर भी दूसरी वस्तुओं के मूल्य में परिवर्तन, उपभोक्ताओं की आय में परिवर्तन अथवा फैशन, रुचि आदि परिवर्तित होने से माँग घट-बढ़ सकती है। दूसरे शब्दों में माँग वक्र खिसक सकता है।

1. माँग में वृद्धि का प्रभाव:
यदि किसी वस्तु की माँग में वृद्धि होती है तथा पूर्ति यथावत् रहती है, तो बाजार में इस वस्तु का मूल्य बढ़ जायेगा क्योंकि इस दशा में उत्पादक या विक्रेता अपनी वस्तु को अधिक मूल्य पर विक्रय कर सकेगा और मात्रा अधिक होने। पर माँग में भी वृद्धि होगा। रेखाचित्र में DD माँग रेखा और SS पूर्ति रेखा बिन्दु E पर काटती है। वस्तु की कीमत OP तथा वस्तु की मात्रा। OQ निर्धारित होता है। माँग में वृद्धि के कारण माँग रेखा खिसक कर D1D1, हो जाता है। नये माँग रेखा पूर्ति वक्र को E1, बिन्दु पर संतुलन करता है, जब संतुलन मूल्य बढ़कर E1Q1 और संतुलन मात्रा OQ1, हो। जाती है। अर्थात् माँग बढ़ने से मूल्य भी बढ़ता है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 15
2. माँग में कमी का प्रभाव:
पूर्ति वक्र यथावत् रहने पर जब माँग में कमी या माँग वक्र बायीं ओर खिसकता है तो संतुलन मूल्य और संतुलन की मात्रा दोनों में कमी हो जाती है। रेखाचित्र में DD माँग रेखा तथा SS पूर्ति रेखा है, E संतुलन बिन्दु है और OQ1 संतुलन की मात्रा है। माँग में कमी के कारण माँग वक्र बायीं ओर खिसक कर D1D1 और मात्रा OQ, रह जाती है। अतः जब वस्तु विशेष पर माँग में कमी आती है, तो उसका मूल्य भी गिर जाता है।
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 16

प्रश्न 8.
निम्न तालिका में प्रतिस्पर्धी फर्म की कुल लागत सारणी को दर्शाया गया है। वस्तु की कीमत ₹ 10 दी हुई है। प्रत्येक उत्पादक स्तर पर लाभ की गणना कीजिए। लाभ – अधिकतमीकरण निर्गत स्तर ज्ञात कीजिए?
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 17
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img t
लाभ:
अधिकतमीकरण निर्गत स्तर 5 इकाइयाँ हैं।

प्रश्न 9.
दो फर्मों वाले एक बाजार को लीजिए। निम्न तालिका दोनों फर्मों की पूर्ति सारणियों को दर्शाती है – SS1, कॉलम में फर्म -1 की पूर्ति सारणी, कॉलम SS2, में फर्म – 2 की पूर्ति सारणी का परिकलन कीजिए?
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 19
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 19

प्रश्न 10.
एक दो फर्मों वाले बाजार को लीजिए। निम्न तालिका में कॉलम SS1, तथा कॉलम SS2, क्रमशः फर्म -1 तथा फर्म – 2 के पूर्ति सारणियों को दर्शाते हैं। बाजार पूर्ति सारणी का परिकलन कीजिए?
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 21
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 12th Economics Important Questions Unit 4 बाजार के स्वरूप (प्रकार) एवं मूल्य निर्धारण img 22

प्रश्न 11.
₹ 10 प्रति इकाई बाजार कीमत पर एक फर्म की सम्प्राप्ति ₹ 50 है। बाजार कीमत बढ़कर ₹ 15 हो जाती है और अब फर्म को ₹ 150 की सम्प्राप्ति होती है। पूर्ति वक्र की कीमत लोच क्या है?
हल: कीमत स्तर ₹ 10 प्रति इकाई बाजार कीमत पर
कुल आगम (TR) = ₹ 50
पूर्ति की गई इकाइयाँ (q0) = \(\frac { TR }{ P }\)
= \(\frac { 50 }{ 10 }\)
= 5 इकाइयाँ
कीमत स्तर ₹ 15 प्रति इकाई बाजार कीमत पर
कुल आगम (TR) = ₹ 150
पूर्ति की गई इकाइयाँ (q1) = \(\frac { TR }{ P }\)
= \(\frac { 150 }{ 15 }\)
= 10 इकाइयाँ
P0 = 10, P1 = 15
कीमत में परिवर्तन ∆p = P1 – P0
= 15 – 10 = ₹5
मात्रा में परिवर्तन ∆q = q1 – q0
= 10 – 5 = 5 इकाइयाँ
es = \(\frac { Δ_{ p } }{ Δ_{ q } } \) x \(\frac { p_{ 0 } }{ q_{ 0 } } \)
= \(\frac { 5 }{ 5 }\) x \(\frac { 10 }{ 5 }\) = 2
पूर्ति की लोच = 2

MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन

MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन

मात्रक एवं मापन अभ्यास के प्रश्न एवं उनके उत्तर

प्रश्न 2.1.
रिक्त स्थान भरिए –

  1. किसी 1 cm भुजा वाले घन का आयतन …………… m3 के बराबर है।
  2. किसी 2 cm त्रिज्या व 10 cm ऊँचाई वाले सिलिंडर का पृष्ठ क्षेत्रफल …………. (mm)2 के बराबर है।
  3. कोई गाड़ी 18 km/h की चाल से चल रही है तो यह 1 s में ………….. m चलती है।
  4. सीसे का आपेक्षिक घनत्व 11.3 है। इसका घनत्व – g cm3 या …………. kg m3 है।.

उत्तर:
1. घन का आयतन = (भुजा)3 = (1 सेमी)3
= 9(\(\frac { 1 }{ 100 }\)मी) [∵ 1 सेमी = \(\frac { 1 }{ 100 }\)मी]

2. सिलिंडर का पृष्ठ क्षेत्रफल
= वक्र पृष्ठ का क्षे० x वृत्तीय सिरों का क्षे०
= 2nr (h + r)
= 2 x 3.14 x 2 सेमी (10 सेमी + 2 सेमी)
= 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 12 वर्ग सेमी
= 150.72 सेमी 2
= 150.72 x (10)2 वर्ग मिमी
= 1.5 x 104 वर्ग मिमी

3. गाड़ी की चाल = 18 किमी/घण्टा
= 18 x 5 मी/सेकण्ड = 5 मीटर/सेकण्ड
∴ 1 सेकण्ड में चली दूरी = चाल x समय
= 5 मी/सेकण्ड x 1 सेकण्ड = 5 मीटर

4. सीसे का घनत्व
= सीसे का आपेक्षिक घनत्व x जल का घनत्व
= 11.3 x 1 ग्राम/सेमी3
= 11.3 ग्राम/सेमी3
= 113( \(\frac { 1 }{ 1000 }\) किग्रा)/(\(\frac { 1 }{ 100 }\)मीटर)3
= 1.13 x 1014 किग्रा प्रति मीटर3

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.2.
रिक्त स्थानों को मात्रकों के उचित परिवर्तन द्वारा भरिए

  1. 1 kg m2s2 =………. g cm2s2
  2. 1 m =………. ly
  3. 3.0 ms2 =…….. Kmh2
  4. G = 6.67 x 1011 Nm2 (kg)2 = ……….. (cm)3 s2 g1

उत्तर:
1. 1 kg m2s2 = 1kg x 1 m2s2
= (100 gm) x (100 cm) 2 x 1 s2
= 10 gm cms-2 – 1 ly (light year) = 9.46 x 1015 मीटर

2. ∵ 1 मीटर = \(\frac { 1 }{ 9.46×10^{ 15 } } \) ly = 1.06 x 1016 ly

3. 3 m2 = 3 m x 1 s2
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन t
= 3.9 x 104 km h2

4. G = 6.67 x 1011 Nm2 (kg)2
= 6.67 x 1011 Nm2 x (\(\frac { 1 }{ kg }\))2)
= 6.67 x 1011 (kg ms2) x 1 m2 x (\(\frac { 1 }{ kg }\)2)
= 6.67 x 1011 x m3s2) x \(\frac { 1 }{ kg }\)
= 6.67 x 1011 x \(\frac { 1 }{ 1000 gm }\) x (100)3 x s2
= 6.67 x 108(cm)3s2g1

प्रश्न 2.3.
ऊष्मा (परागमन में ऊर्जा ) का मात्रक कैलोरी है और यह लगभग 4.2 J के बराबर है। जहाँ 1 J = 1kg m2s2 मान लीजिए कि हम मात्रकों की कोई ऐसी प्रणाली उपयोग करते हैं जिससे द्रव्यमान का मात्रक α kg के बराबर है, लंबाई का मात्रक β m के बराबर है, समय का मात्रक γ s के बराबर है। यह प्रदर्शित कीजिए कि नए मात्रकों के पदों में कैलोरी का परिमाण 4.2 α 1β2 γ2 है।
उत्तर:
कैलोरी = 4.2 जूल = 4.2 किग्रा-मीटर प्रति सेकण्ड।
हम जानते हैं कि ऊर्जा का विमीय सूत्र = [ML2T2]
माना कि दो अलग-अलग मापन पद्धतियों के द्रव्यमान के मात्रक M1 व M2 लम्बाई के मात्रक L1 व L2 एवम् समय के मात्रक T1 व T2 है।

प्रश्नानुसार M1 = 1 किग्रा, L1 = 1 मीटर, T1=1 सेकण्ड, तथा M2 = α किग्रा, L2 = β मीटर, T2 = γ सेकण्ड
इस प्रकार u1 = [M1L21T12]
तथा u2 = [M2L22T22]
n1 = 4.2, n2 = ?
सूत्र n1u1 = n1u2 से,
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 24

अर्थात् दूसरी मापन पद्धति में 1 कैलोरी का मान 4.2 α1 β2 γ2 है।

प्रश्न 2.4.
इस कथन की स्पष्ट व्याख्या कीजिए : तुलना के मानक का विशेष उल्लेख किए बिना “किसी विमीय राशि को बड़ा’ या ‘छोटा’ कहना अर्थहीन है।” इसे ध्यान में रखते हुए नीचे दिए गए कथनों को जहाँ कहीं भी आवश्यक हो, दूसरे शब्दों में व्यक्त कीजिए:

  1. परमाणु बहुत छोटे पिण्ड होते हैं।
  2. जेट वायुयान अत्यधिक गति से चलता है।
  3. बृहस्पति का द्रव्यमान बहुत ही अधिक है।
  4. इस कमरे के अंदर वायु में अणुओं की संख्या बहुत अधिक है।
  5. इलेक्ट्रॉन, प्रोटॉन से बहुत भारी होता है।
  6. ध्वनि की गति प्रकाश की गति से बहुत ही कम होती

उत्तर:
दिया गया कथन सत्य है। सामान्यत: हम कहते हैं कि परमाणु बहुत छोटा पिण्ड है। लेकिन इलेक्ट्रॉन परमाणु से भी छोटा कण है। तब यह भी कह सकते हैं कि इलेक्ट्रॉन की अपेक्षा परमाणु एक बड़ा पिण्ड है। जबकि टेनिस गेंद की तुलना में परमाणु बहुत छोटा पिण्ड है। इस प्रकार हम देखते हैं कि परमाणु को किसी एक वस्तु की अपेक्षा बहुत छोटा कह सकते है जबकि इलेक्ट्रॉन की तुलना में बड़ा पिण्ड का संकेत है।

  1. आलपिन की नोक की तुलना में परमाणु बहुत छोटे पिण्ड होते हैं।
  2. रेलगाड़ी की तुलना में जेट वायुयान अत्यधिक गति से चलता है।
  3. बृहस्पति का द्रव्यमान पृथ्वी की तुलना में बहुत अधिक होता है।
  4. इस कमरे के अन्दर वायु में अणुओं की संख्या वायु के एक ग्राम अणु में उपस्थित अणुओं से काफी अधिक है।
  5. यह कथन सही है।
  6. यह कथन सही है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.5.
लंबाई का कोई ऐसा नया मात्रक चुना गया है जिसके अनुसार निर्वात में प्रकाश की चाल 1 है। लम्बाई के नए मात्रक के पदों में सूर्य तथा पृथ्वी के बीच की दूरी कितनी है, प्रकाश इस दूरी को तय करने में 8 min और 20 s लगाता है।
उत्तर:
प्रश्नानुसार प्रकाश की चाल = 1 मात्रक प्रति सेकण्ड प्रकाश द्वारा लिया गया समय, t = 8 मिनट 20 सेकण्ड
= 8 x 60 + 20 = 500 सेकण्ड
∴ सूर्य एवम् पृथ्वी के मध्य दूरी
= प्रकाश की चाल x लिया गया समय
= 1 मात्रक प्रति सेकण्ड x 500 सेकण्ड
= 500 मात्रक

प्रश्न 2.6.
लंबाई मापने के लिए निम्नलिखित में से कौन – सा सबसे परिशुद्ध यंत्र है:

  1. एक वर्नियर कैलीपर्स जिसके वर्नियर पैमाने पर 20 विभाजन हैं।
  2. एक स्क्रूगेज जिसका चूड़ी अंतराल 1 mm और वृत्तीय पैमाने पर 100 विभाजन है।
  3. कोई प्रकाशिक यंत्र जो प्रकाश की तरंग दैर्ध्य की सीमा के अंदर लंबाई माप सकता है।

उत्तर:
1. वर्नियर कैलीपर्स का अल्पतमांक
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 22

2. स्क्रूगेज की अल्पतमांक
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 23

3. चँकि प्रकाशिक यन्त्र द्वारा प्रकाश की तरंग दैर्ध्य की सीमा के अन्दर लम्बाई मापी जा सकती है।
अतः इसकी अल्पतमांक
= 107 मीटर = 1015 सेमी
अर्थात् प्रकाशिक यन्त्र की अल्पतमांक सबसे कम है। इस कारण यह सर्वाधिक परिशुद्ध यन्त्र है।

प्रश्न 2.7.
कोई छात्र 100 आवर्धन के एक सूक्ष्मदर्शी के द्वारा देखकर मनुष्य के बाल की मोटाई मापता है। वह 20 बार प्रेक्षण करता है और उसे ज्ञात होता है कि सूक्ष्मदर्शी के दृश्य क्षेत्र में बाल की औसत मोटाई 3.5 mm है। बाल की मोटाई का अनुमान क्या है?
उत्तर:
हम जानते हैं कि, सूक्ष्मदर्शी की आवर्धन क्षमता
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 21
अतः बाल की अनुमानित मोटाई = 0.035 मिमी।

प्रश्न 2.8.
निम्नलिखित के उत्तर दीजिए:

  1. आपको एक धागा और मीटर पैमाना दिया जाता है। आप धागे के व्यास का अनुमान किस प्रकार लगाएँगे?
  2. एक स्क्रूगेज का चूड़ी अंतराल 1.0 mm है और उसके वृत्तीय पैमाने पर 200 विभाजन हैं। क्या आप यह सोचते हैं कि वृत्तीय पैमाने पर विभाजनों की संख्या स्वेच्छा से बढ़ा देने पर स्क्रूगेज की यथार्थता में वृद्धि करना संभव है?
  3. वर्नियर कैलीपर्स द्वारा पीतल की किसी पतली छड़ का माध्य व्यास मापा जाना है। केवल 5 मापनों के समुच्चय की तुलना में व्यास के 100 मापनों के समुच्चय के द्वारा अधिक विश्वसनीय अनुमान प्राप्त होने की संभावना क्यों हैं?

उत्तर:
1. एक बेलनाकार छड़ लेकर, इसके ऊपर धागे को सटाकर लपेटते हैं। धागे के फेरों द्वारा घेरी गई छड़ की लम्बाई का मीटर पैमाने द्वारा माप लेते हैं। माना लपेटे गए फेरों की संख्या 20 है।
अत: धागे का व्यास =इस प्रकार धागे का व्यास ज्ञात हो सकता है।

2. हम जानते हैं कि स्क्रूगेज का अल्पतमांक
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 20
प्रश्नानुसार स्क्रूगेज पर बने विभाजनों (भागों) की संख्या बढ़ा देने से, स्क्रूगेज का अल्पतमांक घटेगा अर्थात् यथार्थता बढ़ेगी।

3. हम जानते हैं कि, प्रेक्षणों की माध्य निरपेक्ष त्रुटि,
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 20
उपरोक्त सूत्र के अनुसार प्रेक्षणों की संख्या बढ़ाने से माध्य निरपेक्ष त्रुटि घटेगी। अर्थात् अधिक प्रेक्षणों द्वारा प्राप्त, छड़ का माध्य व्यास अधिक विश्वसनीय होगा।

प्रश्न 2.9.
किसी मकान का फोटोग्राफ 35 mm स्लाइड पर 1.75 cm2 क्षेत्र घेरता है। स्लाइड को किसी स्क्रीन पर प्रक्षेपित किया जाता है और स्क्रीन पर मकान का क्षेत्रफल 1.55 m2 है। प्रक्षेपित्र -परदा व्यवस्था का रेखीय आवर्धन क्या
उत्तर:
दिया है: स्लाइड पर मकान का क्षेत्रफल = 1.75 वर्ग सेमी स्क्रीन पर मकान का क्षेत्रफल
= 1.55 वर्ग मीटर
= 1.55 x (100 सेमी)2
= 1.55 x 10000 सेमी2
= 15500 सेमी2

प्रश्न 2.10.
निम्नलिखित में सार्थक अंकों की संख्या लिखिए:

  1. 0.007 m2
  2. 2.64 x 1024 kg
  3. 0.2370 g cm
  4. 6.320 J
  5. 6.032 Nm2
  6. 0.0006032 m2

उत्तर:

  1. 1
  2. 3
  3. 4
  4. 4
  5. 4
  6. 4

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.11.
धातु की किसी आयताकार शीट की लंबाई, चौड़ाई व मोटाई क्रमशः 4.234 m, 1.005 m व 2.01 cm है। उचित सार्थक अंकों तक इस शीट का क्षेत्रफल व आयतन ज्ञात कीजिए।
उत्तर:
दिया है:
लम्बाई a = 4.234
मीटर चौड़ाई b = 1.005 मीटर
मोटाई c = 2.01 सेंटीमीटर
शीट का पृष्ठ क्षेत्रफल = 2 (ab + bc + ca)
= 2 [4.234 x 1.005 + 1.005 x 2.01 + 2.01 x 4.234]
= 8.7209478 मी2
= 8.72 मीटर2
चूँकि मोटाई में न्यूनतम सार्थक अंक (i.e., 3) है। शीट का आयतन = a x b x c
= 4.234 x 1.005 x 0.0201 मी3
= 0.0855 मीटर3

प्रश्न 2.12.
पंसारी की तुला द्वारा मापे गए डिब्बे का द्रव्यमान 2.300 kg है। सोने के दो टुकड़े जिनका द्रव्यमान 20.15 g व 20.17g है, डिब्बे में रखे जाते हैं।

  1. डिब्बे का कुल द्रव्यमान कितना है
  2. उचित सार्थक अंकों तक टुकड़ों के द्रव्यमानों में कितना अंतर हैं?

उत्तर:
1. दिया है : डिब्बे का द्रव्यमान m = 2.300 किग्रा
पहले टुकड़े का द्रव्यमान m1 = 20.15 ग्राम
= 0.02015 किग्रा
दूसरे टुकड़े का द्रव्यमान m2 = 20.17 ग्राम
= 0.02017 किग्रा
∴ टुकड़े रखने के बाद डिब्बे का कुल द्रव्यमान
M = m + m1 + m2
= 2.300 + 0.02015 + 0.02017
= 2.34032 किग्रा
चूँकि डिब्बे के द्रव्यमान में न्यूनतम सार्थक अंक 4 है। अतः डिब्बे के कुल द्रव्यमान का अधिकतम चार सार्थक अंकों में पूर्णांक करना चाहिए।
∴ कुल द्रव्यमान = 2.340 किग्रा

2. द्रव्यमानों में अन्तर
∆m = m2 – m1 = 20.17 – 20.15
= 0.02 ग्राम
चूँकि अधिकतम सार्थक अंक 4 हैं। अतः इनके अन्तर का दशमलव के दूसरे स्थान तक अर्थात् 0.02 ग्राम होगा।

प्रश्न 2.13.
कोई भौतिक राशि P, चार प्रेक्षण-योग्य राशियों a, b, c तथा d से इस प्रकार संबंधित हैं:
p = \(\frac { a^{ 3 }b^{ 2 } }{ (\sqrt { c } d) } \)
a, b, c तथा d के मापने में प्रतिशत त्रुटियाँ क्रमशः 1%, 3%,4% तथा 2% हैं। राशि Pमें प्रतिशत त्रुटि कितनी है? यदि उपर्युक्त संबंध का उपयोग करके Pका परिकलित मान 3.763 आता है, तो आप परिणाम का किस मान तक निकटन करेंगे?
उत्तर:
दिया है: P =p =\(\frac { a^{ 3 }b^{ 2 } }{ \sqrt { c } d} \)
P के मान में % त्रुटि
= \(\frac {∆p }{ p }\) x 100
= 3 x \(\frac {∆a }{ a }\) x 100 + 2 x \(\frac {∆b }{ b }\) x 100 + \(\frac { 1}{ 2 }\) x \(\frac {∆c }{ c }\) x 100 x \(\frac {∆d }{ d }\) x 100
= 3 x 1% + 2 x 3% +\(\frac { 1}{ 2 }\) x 4% + 2%
= 3% + 6% + 2% + 2%
= 13%
∴ \(\frac {∆p }{ p }\) = 13
∴ ∆P \(\frac { 13 x p}{ 100 }\)
= \(\frac { 13 x 3.763}{ 100}\)
= 0.4891
= 0.489 (उचित सार्थक अंक तीन तक)
अतः
P के मान में त्रुटि 0.489 है। इससे स्पष्ट है कि P के मान में दशमलव के पहले स्थान पर स्थित अंक ही संदिग्ध है। अर्थात् P के मान को दशमलव के दूसरे स्थान तक लिखना कार्य । अतः P के मान का दशमलव के पहले स्थान तक ही पूर्णांकन रना होगा।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.14.
किसी पुस्तक में, जिसमें छपाई की अनेक टियाँ हैं,आवर्त गति कर रहे किसी कण के विस्थापन के चार भन्न सूत्र
दिए गए हैं:

  1. y = a sin 2nt / T
  2. y = a sin vt
  3. y = (a/T) sin tla
  4. y = (av2)(sin 2nt IT + cos 2nt IT)

(a = कण का अधिकतम विस्थापन, y = कण की चाल, “= गति का आवर्त काल)। विमीय आधारों पर गलत सूत्रों को निकाल दीजिए।
उत्तर:
किसी भी त्रिकोणमितीय फलन का कोण एक बमाहीन राशि होती है।

  1. सही है।
  2. ∵ vt विमाहीन नहीं है। अतः यह सूत्र गलत है।
  3. ∵ t / a विमाहीन नहीं है। अत: यह सूत्र गलत है।
  4. सही है।
    ∴ P का निकटतम मान =3.763 =33.8

प्रश्न 2.15.
भौतिकी का एक प्रसिद्ध संबंध किसी कणके ‘चल द्रव्यमान (moving mass)’ m, ‘विराम द्रव्यमान (rest mass) m0 इसकी चाल , और प्रकाश की चाल के बीच है। (यह संबंध सबसे पहले अल्बर्ट आइंस्टाइन के विशेष आपेक्षिकता के सिद्धांत के परिणामस्वरूप उत्पन्न हुआ था।) कोई छात्र इस संबंध को लगभग सही याद करता है लेकिन स्थिरांक c को लगाना भूल जाता है। वह लिखता है:
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 20
अनुमान लगाइए कि c कहाँ लगेगा?
उत्तर:
दिया है:
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 20
(1 – v2)1/2 = \(\frac { m_{ 0 } }{ m } \)
यहाँ दायाँ पक्ष विमाहीन है जबकि बायाँ पक्ष विमापूर्ण है। अतः सूत्र के सही होने के लिए बायाँ पक्ष भी विमाहीन होना है। अर्थात् (1-v2)1/22 के स्थान पर ((1 – v2)/c2)1/2 होना चाहिए।
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 16

प्रश्न 2.16.
परमाण्विक पैमाने पर लम्बाई का सुविधाजनक मात्रक एंगस्ट्रम है और इसे Å : 1 Å= 1010 m द्वारा निर्दिष्ट किया जाता है। हाइड्रोजन के परमाणु का आमाप लगभग 0.5 Å है। हाइड्रोजन परमाणुओं के एक मोल का m’ में कुल आण्विक आयतन कितना होगा?
उत्तर:
हाइड्रोजन के एक अणु में दो परमाणु होते हैं।
∴ एक हाइड्रोजन अणु की त्रिज्या (r) = 1 हाइड्रोजन परमाणु . का आमाप
= 0.5 Å = 0.5 x 1010 मीटर
∴ एक हाइड्रोजन अणु का आयतन
\(\frac { 4 }{ 3 }\) πr3
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 }\) x 3.14 x 10.5 x 1010 मी3
= 5.23 x 1031 मीटर3
∴ 1 मोल हाइड्रोजन गैस में अणुओं की संख्या
= 6.023 x 1023
∴ 1 मोल हाइड्रोजन गैस में आण्विक आयतन  = अणुओं की संख्या – एक अणु का आ०
= 6.023 x 1023 x 5.23 x 1031 मीटर
= 3.15 x 107 मीटर3

प्रश्न 2.17.
किसी आदर्श गैस का एक मोल (ग्राम अणुक)मानक ताप व दाब पर 22.4L आयतन (ग्राम अणुक आयतन) घेरता है। हाइड्रोजन के ग्राम अणुक आयतन तथा उसके एक मोल के परमाण्विक आयतन का अनुपात क्या है? (हाइड्रोजन के अणु की आमाप लगभग Å मानिए)। यह अनुपात इतना अधिक क्यों है?
उत्तर:
∵1 मोल हाइड्रोजन गैस का NTP पर आयतन
= 22.4 लीटर
= 22.4 x 103 मीटर3
जबकि 1 मोल हाइड्रोजन गैस का NTP पर परमाण्विक आयतन = 3.15 x 107 मीटर3
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 16
= 7.11 x 104
इस अनुपात का मान अधिक होने का कारण है कि गैस का आयतन उसमें उपस्थित अणुओं के वास्तविक आयतन की अपेक्षा बहुत अधिक होता है। अर्थात् गैस के अणुओं के मध्य बहुत अधिक खाली स्थान होता है।

प्रश्न 2.18.
इस सामान्य प्रेक्षण की स्पष्ट व्याख्या कीजिए : यदि आप तीव्र गति से गतिमान किसी रेलगाड़ी की खिड़की से बाहर देखें तो समीप के पेड़, मकान आदि रेलगाड़ी की गति की विपरीत दिशा में तेजी से गति करते प्रतीत होते हैं, परन्तु दूरस्थ पिण्ड (पहाड़ियाँ, चंद्रमा, तारे आदि) स्थिर प्रतीत होते हैं। (वास्तव में, क्योंकि आपको ज्ञात है कि आप चल रहे हैं, इसलिए, ये दूरस्थ वस्तुएँ आपको अपने साथ चलती हुई प्रतीत होती हैं)।
उत्तर:
किसी वस्तु का हमारे सापेक्ष गति करते हुए प्रतीत होना, हमारे सापेक्ष वस्तु के कोणीय वेग पर निर्भर करता है। जबकि गाड़ी से यात्रा करते समय सभी वस्तुएँ समान वेग से हमारे पीछे की ओर गतिमान रहती है लेकिन समीप स्थित वस्तुओं का हमारे सापेक्ष कोणीय वेग ज्यादा होता है। अर्थात् वे वस्तुएँ तीव्र गति से पीछे की ओर जाती हुई प्रतीत होती हैं जबकि दूर स्थित वस्तुएँ हमारे सापेक्ष, कम कोणीय वेग से चलती हैं। इस प्रकार वे हमें लगभग स्थिर नजर आती हैं।

प्रश्न 2.19.
समीपी तारों की दूरियाँ ज्ञात करने के लिए अनुभाग 2.3.1 में दिए गए’लंबन’ के सिद्धांत का प्रयोग किया जाता है। सूर्य के परितः अपनी कक्षा में छः महीनों के अंतराल पर पृथ्वी की अपनी दो स्थानों को मिलाने वाली, आधार रेखा AB है। अर्थात् आधार रेखा पृथ्वी की कक्षा के व्यास = 3 x 1011 m के लगभग बराबर है। लेकिन, चूँकि निकटतम तारे भी इतने अधिक दूर हैं कि इतनी लंबी आधार रेखा होने पर भी वे चाप के केवल 1′ (सेकंड, चाप का) की कोटि का लंबन प्रदर्शित करते हैं। खगोलीय पैमाने पर लंबाई का सुविधाजनक मात्रक पारसेक है। यह किसी पिण्ड की वह दूरी है जो पृथ्वी से सूर्य तक की दूरी के बराबर आधार रेखा के दो विपरीत किनारों से चाप के 1′ का लंबन प्रदर्शित करती है। मीटरों में एक पारसेक कितना होता है?
उत्तर:
दिए गए चित्र में S सूर्य तथा E पृथ्वी है। पृथ्वी बिन्दु Pसे 1 पारसेक की दूरी पर है। पृथ्वी की कक्षा की त्रिज्या
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 14
प्रश्नानुसार रेखाखण्ड SE, बिन्दु P पर 1′ पर 1′ का कोण अन्तरित करता है।
इस प्रकार, ∠SPE =1” = (\(\frac { 1 }{ 60 x 60}\))0
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 3600}\) x \(\frac { π }{ 180}\) रेडियन
∠SPE के छोटा होने के कारण PS तथा PE लगभग सम्पाती होंगी।
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 13

प्रश्न 2.20.
हमारे सौर परिवार से निकटतम तारा 4.29 प्रकाश वर्ष दूर है। पारसेक में यह दूरी कितनी है? यह तारा (एल्फा सेंटौरी नामक) तब कितना लंबन प्रदर्शित करेगा जब इसे सूर्य के परितः अपनी कक्षा में पृथ्वी के दो स्थानों से जो छः महीने के अन्तराल पर है, देखा जाएगा?
उत्तर:
तारे की सौर परिवार से दूरी = 4.29 प्रकाश वर्ष
= 4.29 x 9.46 x 1015 मीटर
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 12
अभीष्ट लम्बन = 2 Q
= 2 x तारे की सौर परिवार से दूरी
= 1.32 x 2 = 2.64 सेकण्ड चाप का।

प्रश्न 2.21.
भौतिक राशियों का परिशुद्ध मापन विज्ञान की आवश्यकताएँ हैं। उदाहरण के लिए, किसी शत्रु के लड़ाकू जहाज की चाल सुनिश्चित करने के लिए बहुत ही छोटे समय-अंतरालों पर इसकी स्थिति का पता लगाने की कोई यथार्थ विधि होनी चाहिए। द्वितीय विश्व युद्ध में रेडार की खोज के पीछे वास्तविक प्रयोजन यही था। आधुनिक विज्ञान के उन भिन्न उदाहरणों को सोचिए जिनमें लंबाई, समय द्रव्यमान आदि के परिशुद्ध मापन की आवश्यकता होती है। अन्य जिस किसी विषय में भी आप बता सकते हैं, परिशुद्धता की मात्रात्मक धारणा दीजिए।
उत्तर:

  1. द्रव्यमान का मापन – द्रव्यमान स्पेक्ट्रम लेखी द्वारा परमाणुओं के द्रव्यमान का परिशुद्ध मापन किया जाता है।
  2. लम्बाई का मापन – विभिन्न यौगिकों के क्रिस्टलों में परमाणुओं के मध्य की दूरी का मापन करने के लिए लम्बाई के परिशुद्ध मापन की आवश्यकता होती है।
  3. समय का मापन – फोको विधि से किसी माध्यम में प्रकाश की चाल निकालने के प्रयोग में समय के परिशुद्ध मापन की आवश्यकता होती है।

प्रश्न 2.22.
जिस प्रकार विज्ञान में परिशुद्ध मापन आवश्यक है, उसी प्रकार अल्पविकसित विचारों तथा सामान्य प्रेक्षणों को उपयोग करने वाली राशियों के स्थूल आंकलन कर सकना भी उतना ही महत्त्वपूर्ण है। उन उपायों को सोचिए जिनके द्वारा आप निम्नलिखित का अनुमान लगा सकते हैं : (जहाँ अनुमान लगाना कठिन है वहाँ राशि की उपरिसीमा पता लगाने का प्रयास कीजिए।

  1. मानसून की अवधि में भारत के ऊपर वर्षाधारी मेघों का कुल द्रव्यमान।
  2. किसी हाथी का द्रव्यमान।
  3. किसी तूफान की अवधि में वायु की चाल।
  4. आपके सिर के बालों की संख्या।
  5. आपकी कक्षा के कमरे में वायु के अणुओं की संख्या।

उत्तर:
1. भारत में कुल वर्षा का द्रव्यमान = बादल का द्रव्यमान
= औसत वर्षा x भारत का क्षेत्रफल – जल का घनत्व
= 10 सेमी x 3.3 x 1012 मीटर2 x 103 किग्रा मीटर3
= 3.3 x 1014 किग्रा

2. हाथी का द्रव्यमान लीवर के सिद्धान्त द्वारा निकाला जा सकता है। यह लगभग 3000 किग्रा होता है।

3. किसी तूफान की अवधि में वायु द्वारा उत्पन्न दाब को मापकर, वायु की चाल ज्ञात की जा सकती है। तूफान की चाल लगभग 80 किमी प्रति घण्टा होती है। यह चाल 300 किमी प्रति घण्टा से अधिक भी हो सकती है।

4. मनुष्य के बालों की संख्या
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 11
हम जानते हैं : बाल की मोटाई t = 5 x 103 सेमी तथा मनुष्य के सिर की औसत त्रिज्या =8 सेमी
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 10

5. वायु के 1 मोल का NTP पर आयतन = 22.4 लीटर
= 22.4 x 103मीटर3
माना कक्षा के कमरे का आयतन = V
= 5 x 4 x 3 (माना)
= 60 मी3
∴ कक्षा के कमरे में गैस अणुओं की संख्या कक्षा के कमरे का आ०
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 9

प्रश्न 2.23.
सूर्य एक ऊष्म प्लाज्मा (आयनीकृत पदार्थ) है। जिसके आंतरिक क्रोड का ताप 107 K से अधिक और बाह्य पृष्ठ का ताप लगभग 6000 K है। इतने अधिक ताप पर कोई भी पदार्थ ठोस या तरल प्रावस्था में नहीं रह सकता। आपको सूर्य का द्रव्यमान घनत्व किस परिसर में होने की आशा है? क्या यह ठोसों, तरलों या गैसों के घनत्वों के परिसर में है? क्या आपका अनुमान सही है, इसकी जाँच आप निम्नलिखित आंकड़ों के आधार पर कर सकते हैं : सूर्य का द्रव्यमान = 2.0 x 1030 kg; सूर्य की त्रिज्या = 7.0 x 108 ml
उत्तर:
दिया है : M = 2 x 1030 किग्रा,
R=7.0 x 108 मीटर
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 8
सूर्य का द्रव्यमान द्रवों/ठोस के घनत्व परिसर में होता है। यह गैसों के घनत्वों के परिसर में नहीं होता है। सूर्य की भीतरी पर्तों के कारण बाहरी पर्तों पर अंतर्मुखी गुरुत्वाकर्षण बल के कारण ही गर्म प्लाज्मा का इतना अधिक घनत्व हो जाता है।

प्रश्न 2.24.
जब बृहस्पति ग्रह पृथ्वी से 8247 लाख किलोमीटर दूर होता है, तो इसके व्यास की कोणीय माप 35.72” की चाप है। बृहस्पति का व्यास परिकलित कीजिए।
उत्तर:
दिया है : पृथ्वी से बृहस्पति की दूरी =d
= 824.7 x 1016 किमी
θ = 35.72″
= 35.72 x 4.85 x 106 रेडियन
बृहस्पति का व्यास, D = ?
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 7
D = θ x d
= 35.72 x 4.85 x 106 x 824.7 x 106
= 1.429 x 105 किमी।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.25.
वर्षा के समय में कोई व्यक्ति चाल के साथ तेजी से चला जा रहा है। उसे अपने छाते को टेढ़ा करके ऊर्ध्व के साथ एकोण बनाना पड़ता है। कोई विद्यार्थी कोण θ व v के बीच निम्नलिखित संबंध व्युत्पन्न करता है:
tan θ = v
और वह इस संबंध के औचित्य की सीमा पता लगाता है : जैसी कि आशा की जाती है यदि v → 0 तो θ → 0 (हम यह मान रहे हैं कि तेज हवा नहीं चल रही है और किसी खड़े व्यक्ति के लिए वर्षा ऊर्ध्वाधरतः पड़ रही है)। क्या आप सोचते हैं कि यह संबंध सही हो सकता है? यदि ऐसा नहीं हो तो सही संबंध का अनुमान लगाइए।
उत्तर:
दिया है : tan θ = v
यह सम्बन्ध असत्य है क्योंकि इस सम्बन्ध में बायाँ पक्ष विमाहीन है जबकि दाएँ पक्ष की विमा [LT1] है। अतः दाएँ पक्ष में वर्षा की बूंदों के वेग से भाग देना चाहिए।
∴सही सम्बन्ध tan θ = \(\frac { v }{ u}\) होगा।

प्रश्न 2.26.
यह दावा किया जाता है कि यदि बिना किसी बाधा के 100 वर्षों तक दो सीज़ियम घड़ियों को चलने दिया जाए, तो उनके समयों में केवल 0.02 s का अंतर हो सकता है। मानक सीज़ियम घड़ी द्वारा 15 के समय अंतराल को मापने में यथार्थता के लिए इसका क्या अभिप्राय है?
उत्तर:
कुल समय = 100 वर्ष
= 100 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 सेकण्ड
समय में अन्तर = 0.2 सेकण्ड
∴ 1 सेकण्ड के मापन में त्रुटि
= \(\frac { ∆T}{ T }\)
= \(\frac { 0.2}{ 100 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 }\)
= 6.34×1012
= 1011
\(\frac { 1 }{ 10^{ 11 } } \)
अर्थात् सीजियम घड़ी द्वारा 1 सेकण्ड में मापने में, 1011 में से 1 भाग की परिशुद्धता होती है।

प्रश्न 2.27.
एक सोडियम परमाणु का आमाप लगभग 2.5 A मानते हुए उसके माध्य द्रव्यमान घनत्व का अनुमान लगाइए। (सोडियम के परमाण्वीय द्रव्यमान तथा आवोगाद्रो संख्या के ज्ञात मान का प्रयोग कीजिए।) इस घनत्व की क्रिस्टलीय प्रावस्था में सोडियम के घनत्व 970 kg m3 के साथ तुलना कीजिए। क्या इन दोनों घनत्वों के परिमाण की कोटि समान है? यदि हाँ, तो क्यों? ।
उत्तर:
दिया है: सोडियम परमाणु की त्रिज्या (आमाप)
= 2.5 A = 2.5 x 1010 मीटर
सोडियम का ग्राम परमाणु भार = 23 ग्राम
= 23 x 103 किग्रा
एक ग्राम परमाणु में परमाणुओं की संख्या
= N = 6.023 x 1023
सोडियम के एक परमाणु का द्रव्यमान
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 6

प्रश्न 2.28.
नाभिकीय पैमाने पर लंबाई का सुविधाजनक मात्रक फर्मी है : (1f= 1015 m)। नाभिकीय आमाप लगभग निम्नलिखित आनुभविक संबंध का पालन करते हैं :
r = r0A1/3
जहाँ नाभिक की त्रिज्या,A इसकी द्रव्यमान संख्या और r0 कोई स्थिरांक है जो लगभग 1.2f के बराबर है। यह प्रदर्शित कीजिए कि इस नियम का अर्थ है कि विभिन्न नाभिकों के लिए नाभिकीय द्रव्यमान घनत्व लगभग स्थिर है। सोडियम नाभिक के द्रव्यमान घनत्व का आंकलन कीजिए।

प्रश्न 2.29.
लेसर (LASER), प्रकाश के अत्यधिक तीव्र एकवर्णी तथा एकदिश किरण – पुंज का स्त्रोत है। लेसर के इन गुणों का लंबी दूरियाँ मापने में उपयोग किया जाता है। लेसर को प्रकाश के स्त्रोत के रूप में उपयोग करते हुए पहले ही चंद्रमा की पृथ्वी से दूरी परिशुद्धता के साथ ज्ञात की जा चुकी है। कोई लेसर प्रकाश किरण-पुंज चंद्रमा के पृष्ठ से परावर्तित होकर 2.56 s में वापस आ जाता है। पृथ्वी के परितः चंद्रमा की कक्षा की त्रिज्या कितनी है?
उत्तर:
दिया है : लेसर प्रकाश द्वारा लिया गया समय, t = 2.56 सेकण्ड
माना चन्द्रमा की कक्षा की त्रिज्या = r
अत: लेसर प्रकाश द्वारा चली दूरी = 2r
प्रकाश की चाल, c = 3 x 108 मीटर/सेकण्ड
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 3
=3.84 x 108 मीटर
=3.8 x 105 किमी

प्रश्न 2.30.
जल के नीचे वस्तुओं को ढूँढ़ने व उनके स्थान का पता लगाने के लिए सोनार (SONAR) में पराश्रव्य तरंगों का प्रयोग होता है। कोई पनडुब्बी सोनार से सुसज्जित है। इसके द्वारा जनित अन्वेषी तरंग और शत्रु की पनडुब्बी से परावर्तित इसकी प्रतिध्वनि की प्राप्ति के बीच काल विलंब 77.0 s है। शत्रु की पनडुब्बी कितनी दूर है? (जल में ध्वनि की चाल
= 1450 ms1)
उत्तर:
दिया है : ध्वनि द्वारा लिया गया समय = 77 सेकण्ड
जल में ध्वनि की चाल = 1450 मीटर/सेकण्ड
माना पनडुब्बी की दूरी = x
∴ ध्वनि तरंगों द्वारा चली गई दूरी = 2x
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन l
या
x = \(\frac {1450×77 }{ 2 }\)
= 55825 मीटर
= 55.83 x 103 मीटर
= 55.83 किमी

प्रश्न 2.31.
हमारे विश्व में आधुनिक खगोलविदों द्वारा खोजे गए सर्वाधिक दूरस्थ पिण्ड इतनी दूर हैं कि उनके द्वारा उत्सर्जित प्रकाश को पृथ्वी तक पहुँचने में अरबों वर्ष लगते हैं। इन पिंडों (जिन्हें क्वासर (Quasar) कहा जाता है) के कई रहस्यमय लक्षण हैं जिनकी अभी तक संतोषजनक व्याख्या नहीं की जा सकी है। किसी ऐसे क्वासर की km में दूरी ज्ञात कीजिए जिससे उत्सर्जित प्रकाश को हम तक पहुँचने में 300 करोड़ वर्ष लगते हों।
उत्तर:
लिया गया समय, t = 3 x 109 वर्ष
= 3 x 109 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 सेकण्ड
प्रकाश की चाल c = 3 x 108 मीटर/सेकण्ड
माना क्वासर की पृथ्वी से दूरी = x
∴ x = चाल x समय
= 3 x 108 x 3 x 109 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60
= 2.84 x 1022 किमी

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.32.
यह एक विख्यात तथ्य है कि पूर्ण सूर्यग्रहण की अवधि में चंद्रमा की चक्रिका सूर्य की चक्रिका को पूरी तरक ढक लेती है। इस तथ्य और उदाहरण 2.3 और 2.4 से एकत्र सूचनाओं के आधार पर चंद्रमा का लगभग व्यास ज्ञात कीजिए।
उत्तर:
दिया है : चन्द्रमा की पृथ्वी से दूरी
(a) = 3.84 x 108 मीटर
माना चन्द्रमा का व्यास = 2r
सूत्र कोणीय व्यास = 4 से
चन्द्रमा का कोणीय व्यास = \(\frac { d }{ 3.84×10^{ 8 } } \) रेडियन
= \(\frac { d }{ 3.84×10^{ 8 } } \) x \(\frac { 180 }{ π }\) x 60 x 60
प्रश्नानुसार पूर्ण सूर्य ग्रहण की अवधि में चन्द्रमा की चक्रिका सूर्य की चक्रिका को पूरा ढक लेती हैं।
∴ चन्द्रमा का कोणीय व्यास = सूर्य का कोणीय व्यास
∴d = \(\frac { 1920×3.84×10^{ 8 }π }{ 180x60x60 } \) मीटर
= 3.573 x 106 मीटर
= 3573 x 103 मीटर
= 3573 किमी
अतः चन्द्रमा का व्यास 3573 किमी है।

प्रश्न 2.33.
इस शताब्दी के एक महान भौतिकविद (पी० ए० एम० डिरैक) प्रकृति के मूल स्थिरांकों (नियतांकों) के आंकिक मानों के साथ क्रीड़ा में आनंद लेते थे। इससे उन्होंने एक बहुत ही रोचक प्रेक्षण किया। परमाण्वीय भौतिकी के मूल नियतांकों (जैसे इलेक्ट्रॉन का द्रव्यमान, प्रोटॉन का द्रव्यमान तथा गुरुत्वीय नियतांक G) से उन्हें पता लगा कि वे एक ऐसी संख्या पर पहुंच गए हैं जिसकी विमा समय की विमा है। साथ ही, यह एक बहुत ही बड़ी संख्या थी और इसका परिमाण विश्व की वर्तमान आकलित आयु (~1500 करोड़ वर्ष) के करीब है। इस पुस्तक में दी गई मूल नियतांकों की सारणी के आधार पर यह देखने का प्रयास कीजिए कि क्या आप भी यह संख्या (या और कोई अन्य रोचक संख्या जिसे आप सोच सकते हैं) बना सकते हैं? यदि विश्व की आयु तथा इस संख्या में समानता महत्वपूर्ण है, तो मूल नियतांकों की स्थिरता किस प्रकार प्रभावित होगी?
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 मात्रक एवं मापन 1

MP Board Class 11 Physics Solutions

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Polymers

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions  Chapter 15 Polymers

Polymers NCERT Intext Exercises

Question 1.
What are polymers?
Answer:
Polymers are high molecular mass substances consisting of large numbers of repeating structural units. Some examples of polymers are polythene, bakelite, rubber, nylon 6,6, etc.

Question 2.
How are polymers classified on the basis of structure ?
Answer:
On the basis of structure, polymers are classified as:

  • Linear polymers: e.g. polyethene, nylons, polyvinylchloride etc.
  • Branched chain polymers: e.g. low density polythene, glycogen.
  • Cross-linked polymers: e.g. bakelite, melamine, etc.

Question 3.
Write the names of monomers of the following polymers:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 4
Answer:

  • Hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid
  • Caprolactum
  • Tetrafluoroethene.

Question 4.
Classify the following as addition and condensation polymers: Terylene, Bakelite, Polyvinyl chloride, Polythene.
Answer:

  • Addition polymers: Polyvinyl chloride, Polythene
  • Condensation polymers: Terylene, Bakelite

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Explain the difference between Buna-N and Buna-S.
Answer:
Buna-N is a co-polymer of 1,3-butadiene and acrylonitrile Buna-S is a co-polymer of 1,3-butadiene and styrene.

Question 6.
Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their inter molecular forces:

  1. Nylon 6,6, Buna-S, Polythene.
  2. Nylon 6, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride.

Answer:
In the order of increasing intermolecular forces.

  • Buna – S, Polythene, Nylon – 66
  • Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride, Nylon – 6

Polymers NCERT Text Book Exercises

Question 1.
Explain the terms polymer and monomer.
Answer:
Polymers are high molecular mass substances (103-107u) formed by the combi-nation of a large number of simple molecules. They are also called macromolecules. For example, polyethene, bakelite, PVC, teflon etc.

Monomer:
Monomer is a simple molecule capable of undergoing polymerization to form polymers. For example, polyethylene is a polymer and its simple molecule ethene is a monomer.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 5

Question 2.
What are natural and synthetic polymers? Give two examples of each type.
Answer:
Natural polymers are polymers that are found in nature. They are formed by plants and animals. Examples include protein, cellulose, starch, etc.

Synthetic polymers are polymers made by human beings Examples include plastic (polythene), synthetic fibers (nylon 6, 6), synthetic rubbers (Buna-S).

Question 3.
Distinguish between the terms homopolymer and copolymer and give an example of each.
Answer:
Homopolymers are the polymers which are made by the addition polymerization of a single type of monomeric species.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 6

Co-polymers are the polymers which are made by addition polymerization from two different monomers.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 7

Question 4.
How do you explain the functionality of a monomer?
Answer:
Functionality means the number of binding sites in a molecule. For example, the functionality of ethene, propene, styrene, acrylonitrile is one while that of 1,3 – butadiene, adipic acid, terephthalic acid, hexamethylene diamine is two.

Question 5.
Define the term polymerization.
Answer:
Polymerisation is the process of forming high molecular mass (103-107u) macromolecules, which consist of repeating structural units derived from monomers. In a polymer, various monomer units are joined by strong covalent bonds.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Is (NH – CHR – CO)n a homopolymer or copolymer?
Answer:
It is a homopolymer because the repeating structural unit has only one type of monomer unit, i.e., NH2 – CHR – COOH.

Question 7.
In which classes, the polymers are classified on the basis of molecular forces?
Answer:
On the basis of the magnitude of intermolecular forces present in polymers, they are classified into the following groups:

  • Elastomers
  • Fibers
  • Thermoplastic polymers
  • Thermosetting polymers

Question 8.
How can you differentiate between addition and condensation polymerization?
Answer:
Addition polymerization:
The molecules of the same or different monomers add together to form a macromolecule. Without the elimination of anything, the additional polymers are formed by monomers which are unsaturated compounds. For example, the formation of polyethylene from ethene.

Condensation polymerization:
Two or more bi-functional molecules undergo a series of condensation reactions with the elimination of some simple molecules like H2O, R – OH, NH3, HCl or CO2, etc., to form a macromolecule (Polymer). For example, Nylon-6,6 is a condensation polymer of hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid formed by the elimination of water molecules.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
Explain the term co-polymerization and give two examples.
Answer:
When two or more different monomers unite together to polymerize, the result- product is called a copolymer and the process is termed copolymerization. Thus, a copolymer contains a large number of units of each monomer used in the same polymeric chain. For example, Buna-S and Buna-N whereas Buna-S is a copolymer of 1,3-butadiene and styrene while Buna-N is a copolymer of 1,3-butadiene and acrylonitrile.

Question 10.
Write the free radical mechanism for the polymerization of ethene.
Answer:
In the presence of Benzoyl peroxide, the polymerization of ethane can be under¬stand by the free radical mechanism.
Chain initiation step:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 8
Chain propagation step:
C6H5 + CH2 = CH2 → C6H5 – CH2 – CH2

Chain termination step:
C6H5 – CH2– CH2 + CH2 = CH2 → C6H5 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 → C6H5(- CH2 – CH2-)n CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2(- CH2 – CH2 – )KC6H5 Polythene

Question 11.
Define thermoplastics and thermosetting polymers with two examples of each.
Answer:
Thermoplastics polymers are linear (slightly branched) long-chain polymers, which can be repeatedly softened and hardened on heating. Hence, they can be modified again and again. Examples include polyethylene, polystyrene.

Thermosetting polymers are cross-linked or heavily branded polymers that get hardened during molding process. These plastics cannot be softened again on heating. Examples of thermosetting plastics include bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resins.

Question 12.
Write the monomers used for getting the following polymers:

  1. Polyvinyl chloride
  2. Teflon
  3. Bakelite.

Answer:

  1. Vinyl chloride (CH2 = CH – Cl)
  2. Tetrafluoroethylene (CF2 = CF2)
  3. Phenol (C6H5OH) and Formaldehyde (HCHO).

Question 13.
Write the name and structure of one of the common initiators used in free radical addition polymerization.
Answer:
Benzoyl peroxide:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 9

Question 14.
How does the presence of double bonds in rubber molecules influence their structure and reactivity?
Answer:
From the structural point of view, the natural rubber is a linear cis- 1,4-polyisoprene. In this polymer, the double bonds are located between C2 and C3 of isoprene units. This cis-configuration about double bonds does not allow the chains to come closer for effective interactions and hence intermolecular forces are quite-weak. Therefore, natural rubber has a coiled structure and shows elasticity.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 10

Question 15.
Discuss the main purpose of the vulcanization of rubber.
Answer:
Natural rubber though useful has some problems associated with its use. These limitations are discussed below;

  • Natural rubber is quite soft and sticky at room temperature. At elevated temperatures (>335K), it becomes even softer. At low temperature (<283K) it becomes brittle. Thus to maintain its elasticity, natural rubber is generally used in the temperature range of 283K-335K.
  • It has the capacity to absorb large amounts of water.
  • It has low tensile strength and low resistance to abrasion.
  • It is soluble in non-polar solvents
  • It is easily attacked by oxidizing agents
  • Vulcanization of natural rubber is done to improve all these properties. In this process, a mixture of raw rubber with sulphur and appropriate additive is heated at a temperature range between 373K and 415K.

Question 16.
What are the monomeric repeating units of Nylon-6 and Nylon-6,6?
Answer:
Nylon-6: Caprolactum Nylon-6,6: hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
Write the names and structures of the monomers of the following polymers:
(i) Buna-S
(ii) Buna-N
(iii) Dacron
(iv) Neoprene.
Answer:
Names and structures of the monomers:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 11

Question 18.
Identify the monomer in the following polymeric structures:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 12
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 13

Question 19.
How is dacron obtained from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid?
Answer:
Dacron is obtained by the polymerization of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 14

Question 20.
What is a biodegradable polymer? Give an example of a biodegradable aliphatic polyester.
Answer:
The polymers which are degraded by micro-organism within a suitable period of time so that the polymers and their degraded products do not cause any serious effects on the environment are called biodegradable polymers. An example of biodegradable aliphatic polyester is PHBV. (Poly-β-hydroxybutyrate – CO – β – hydroxy valerate)
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 15

Polymers Other Important Exercises

Polymers Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following is false:
(a) Artificial silk is derived from cellulose
(b) Nylon-6,6 is an example of an elastomer
(c) The repeat unit in natural rubber is isoprene
(d) Both starch and cellulose are polymers of glucose.
Answer:
(b) Nylon-6,6 is an example of an elastomer

Question 2.
Formation of polyethylene from calcium carbide takes place as follows:
CaC2 + 2H2O → Ca(OH)2 + C2H2
C2H2 + H2 → C2H4
nC2 H4 → (- CH2 – CH2 -)n
The amount of polyethylene obtained from 64-0 kg CaC2 is:
(a) 7 kg
(b) 14 kg
(c) 21 kg
(d) 28 kg.
Answer:
(d)28 kg.

Question 3.
Which of the following statements about low density polythene is false:
(a) Its synthesis requires high pressure
(b) It is a poor conductor of electricity
(c) Its synthesis requires dioxygen or a peroxide initiator as a catalyst
(d) It is used in the manufacture of buckets, dustbin etc.
Answer:
(d) It is used in the manufacture of buckets, dustbin etc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Nylon is an example of:
(a) Polyamide
(b) Polythene
(c) Polyester
(d) Polysaccharide.
Answer:
(a) Polyamide

Question 5.
Natural rubber has:
(a) Alternate cis- and tnms-configuration
(b) Random cis- and /ram-configuration
(c) All cis-configuration
(d) All trans-configuration.
Answer:
(c) All cis-configuration

Question 6.
Which of the following is not a condensation polymer :
(a) Melamine
(b) Glyptal
(c) Dacron
(d) Neoprene.
Answer:
(d) Neoprene.

Question 7.
Which is a monomer of neoprene in the following :
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 1
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 2

Question 8.
Which of the following is a biodegradable polymer:
(a) Polythene
(b) Bakelite
(c) PHBV
(d) P.V.C.
Answer:
(c) PHBV

Question 9.
Which of the following has ester linkage:
(a) Nylon
(b) Bakelite
(c) Terylene
(d) P.V.C.
(e) Rubber.
Answer:
(c) Terylene

MP Board Solutions

Question 10.
Teflon is a polymer of:
(a) Tetrafluoroethylene
(b) Tetraiodoethylene
(c) Tetrabromoethylene
(d) Tetrachloroethylene.
Answer:
(a) Tetrafluoroethylene

Question 11.
Nylon threads are made up of:
(a) Polyamide polymer
(b) Polyethylene polymer
(c) Polyvinyl polymer
(d) Polyester polymer.
Answer:
(a) Polyamide polymer

Question 12.
Bakelite is a polymer of:
(a) HCHO and acetic acid
(b) HCHO and phenol
(c) C2H5OH and phenol
(d) CH3COOH and benzene,
Answer:
(b) HCHO and phenol

Question 13.
Which of the following is a biodegradable polymer:
(a) Cellulose
(b) Polyethene
(c) Polyvinylchloride
(d) Nylon-6.
Answer:
(a) Cellulose

Question 14.
Nylon-6,6 is not a:
(a) Condensation polymer
(b) Copolymer
(c) Polyamide
(d) Homopolymer.
Answer:
(d) Homopolymer.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
Which of the following is a chain-growth polymer:
(a) Starch
(b) Nucleic acid
(c) Poly styrene
(d) Protein
Answer:
(c) Poly styrene

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. …………… Is used for the preparation of chloroprene.
  2. Charge on polymers is ……………
  3. Molecular mass of polymers is ……………
  4. Glucose is a monomer of ……………
  5. Cellulose is a …………… polymer.
  6. Polymer of ethylene glycol and phthalic acid is ……………
  7. Rubber is a …………… polymer.
  8. Vulcanisation of rubber is an example of ……………
  9. Bakelite is a …………… polymer.
  10. Polymer used for making pipes is ……………
  11. Nylon 6 is also called ……………
  12. Teflon is a polymer of ……………

Answer:

  1. Synthetic rubber
  2. Nil (zero)
  3. High
  4. Cellulose and starch
  5. Natural
  6. Glyptal
  7. Natural
  8. Elastomer
  9. Heat resistant
  10. PVC
  11. Perlon-L
  12. Tetra fluoro ethylene.

Question 3.
Match the following:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 3
Answer:

  1. (d) Polyethylene glycol phthalate
  2. (a) Adipic acid and hexa methylene diamine
  3. (c) Caprolactum
  4. (f) Lucite
  5. (b) Melamine
  6. (g) Polytetrafluoroethene
  7. (e) Dacron
  8. (h) Bakelite.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Answer in one word / sentence:

  1. Give two examples of natural polymer.
  2. Give two examples of addition polymer.
  3. Give two examples of condensation polymer.
  4. Write chemical name of Buna rubber.
  5. What is Buna-S ?
  6. Give an example of synthetic rubber.
  7. Monomer of polythylene is.
  8. Give the name of polymer used for formation of tyre thread.
  9. Name the polymerisation which takes place by addition of two or more than two different monomers.
  10. Name the polymer which is formed by condensation of ethylene glycol and dimethyl terephthalic acid.

Answer:

  1. Natural polymer-Rubber, starch
  2. Polythene, Polypropylene
  3. Nylon, Bakelite
  4. Styrene Butadiene rubber
  5. It is a co-polymer of Butadiene and styrene. Bu is for Butadiene Na for sodium and S-for styrene
  6. Styrene Butadiene rubber (S.B.R.)
  7. Ethylene
  8. Terylene
  9. Co-polymerisation
  10. Terylene.

MP Board Solutions

Polymers Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Can a copolymer be formed both in addition and condensation polymeri-zation ?
Answer:
Yes, it can be formed in both the cases, e.g., buna-S is a copolymer of styrene, 1,3 – butadiene and sodium and is an addition polymer. Nylon-6,6 is a condensation co-polymer in which monomers are different, i.e., adipic acid and hexamethylene diamine.

Question 2.
What is the difference between two notations: nylon-6 and nylon-6,6 ?
Answer:
Nylon-6 is obtained from caprolactum which is obtained from cyclohexane. It has only one compound having 6 carbon atom.
Nylon-6,6 refers to polymer obtained from 6 carbon atom of dicarboxylic acid (adipic acid) and 6 carbon atoms of diamine.

Question 3.
Arrange the following polymers in the increasing order of their intermo – lecular forces. Also classify them as addition and condensation polymer. Nylon-6,6, Buna-S, Polythene.
Answer:

  • Polythene < buna-S < nylon-6,6.
  • Nylon – 6,6 – condensation polymer
  • buna – S, polythene – addition polymer.

Question 4.
In a classroom discussion, Ramu said that bakelite on heating changes to a hard, infusible mass.

  1. Is his statement correct?
  2. What type of plastic is this?
  3. What are the monomers used for the production of bakelite?
  4. Can you convert switch made from bakelite into Formica tabletop? Comment.
  5. How is the polymer bakelite different from the polymer PVC?

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Thermosetting plastic.
  3. Phenol and HCHO.
  4. Bakelite is a thermosetting plastic having a three-dimensional network structure. Thermosetting plastic once shaped changes to a hard infusible mass that can’t be reshaped or restructured.
  5. Bakelite is a thermosetting plastic and PVC is a thermoplastic.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Are polyesters and polyacrylates same ? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Polyesters and polyacrylates are different types of polymer and differ in following ways:

  • Polyacrylates are homopolymer, while the polyesters are co-polymer in nature.
  • The mode of synthesis of polyacrylates is addition polymerization, while those of polyester is condensation polymerization.
  • Polymerization occurs across C = C bond in polyacrylates whereas, in polyesters it is through ester linkage.

Question 6.
Why should one always use the purest form of monomer in free radical polymerization reaction?
Answer:
In free radical polymerization, the impurities can act as chain transfer agent and may combine with the free radical to slow down the reaction or even stop the reaction.

Question 7.
Polymers are found use in everyday life. What is the purpose of,

  1. Teflon coating on some frying pans.
  2. Vinyl coating on some wallpapers.
  3. PVC covering of electrical connecting wires.

Answer:

  1. Teflon is very inert and is resistant to heat and chemicals. So Teflon coating is used in frying pans.
  2. PVC is a pliable polymer, it is a thermoplastic and is used in some wallpapers.
  3. PVC is a chemically inert and bad conductor of heat and electricity. So PVC covering is used in electrical connecting wires.

Question 8.
What are polythene ? Write its two uses.
Answer:
It is prepared by heating ethylene at about 473 K under high pressure (1500-2000 atm) in presence of a very small amount of oxygen.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 16
Uses:

  • It is used for packaging.
  • It is used as an insulator for electrical wires and cables.
  • In the manufacture of pipes, bottles, etc.

Question 9.
What is neoprene rubber? Write its uses.
Answer:
Neoprene is a thermoplastic polymer of 2 – chloro – 1, 3 – butadiene (Chloroprene).
Method of preparation: By polymerisation of chloroprene in presence of potassium persulphate.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 17
Uses:

  • For making petrol delivery pipes.
  • For making conveyer belts used in coal mines.

Question 10.
What is PVC ? Write its uses.
Answer:
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is a higher polymer of vinyl chloride.

Preparation:
It is prepared by heating vinyl chloride in an inert solvent in the presence of benzoyl peroxide
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 18
Uses:
It is used for making plastic pipes, gramophone records, toys, buckets, electric insulators, raincoat, hand bag and water proof substances

Question 11.
What is teflon ? Write its uses.
Answer:
It is a polymer obtained by the polymerization of tetrafluoroethylene in presence of benzoyl peroxide.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 19
Uses: For making gasket, packing of pump, valve seal, bearing, etc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
What is cellulose ? Write its uses.
Answer:
Cellulose is a natural polysaccharide, molecular formula of cellulose is (C6H10O5)n. It is the main constituent of cell wall of plants and is also found in the tissues of some animals. Wood contain 60% and cotton 90% of cellulose. It is an organic compound found in abundance in nature.
Uses:
It is used to manufacture semi synthetic polymer, artificial thread and plastic.

Question 13.
What is Zieglar – Natta catalyst ? Write its uses.
Answer:
Zieglar – Natta catalyst:
Mixture of titanium tetrachloride and aluminium compound in an inert solvent (hexane) is called Zieglar – Natta catalyst.

Uses:
(i) At low pressure and temperature polythene is formed from ethylene.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 20
It is used for making toys, radio, T.V., cabinet.

(ii) At low temperature and pressure, propylene in presence of Zieglar – Natta catalyst form polypropylene
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 21
It is used for making bottles, pipes, gramophone records.

Question 14.
Differentiate between Nylon – 6 and Nylon-6,6.
Answer:
Difference between Nylon-6 and Nylon-6,6 polymer:

Nylon-6:

  • This is prepared by the condensation of caprolactam molecules.
  • Caprolactam contains a chain of 6 atoms hence this polymer is nylon-6.
  • It is used in sheets, bristles for brushes. Crinkled nylon is also used in elastic hosiery.

Nylon-6,6:

  • This is obtained by the condensation of hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid monomers.
  • Adipic acid and hexamethylenedi amine both the compounds contain a chain of 6 carbons hence the polymer is called nylon-6, 6.
  • It is used in manufacture of tyres, cords, fabrics and ropes.

Question 15.
Describe the preparation, properties and uses of teflon.
Answer:
Teflon or Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE):
This is obtained by the polymer – ization of tetrafluoroethylene. Tetrafluoroethylene is heated under pressure in the presence of ammonium peroxosuiphate.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 22
Properties:

  • It is hard, heat resistant and chemically inert. It melts at 330 °C. It is unaffected by concentrated acids (cone. HNO3, cone. H2SO4, cone. HCl), aqua regia and concentrated sodium hydroxide solution even at high temperature.
  • It is bad conductor of electricity.

Uses:

  • It is used in making cans used to store concentrated acid, aqua regia etc.
  • It is used as a non sticky coating on utensils.

Question 16.
How is bakelite prepared ? Write its uses also.
Answer:
Bakelite is cross – linked polymer. It is prepared by condensation of phenol and formaldehyde in presence of alkali.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 23

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 24
Uses:
Soft bakelite formed due to less polymerization are used as binder in wooden items, in varnishes and liquors. Hard bakelite are formed by high degree of polymerization and are used for manufacture of electrical goods, comb, fountain pens, gramophone records, table tops like pharmica, etc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
Write the method of preparation, properties and uses of Nylon-6,6.
Answer:
Preparation:
Nylon is a polymer containing amideMP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 25Nylon-6,6 is prepared by the polymerization of hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid. The meaning of 6,6 is that in the polymer chain both acid and diamine molecules contain 6-6 carbon atoms.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 26
Properties:

  • Nylon threads possess high tensile strength.
  • They are hard.
  • They are elastic in nature.
  • Structure of nylon is like protein.

Uses:

  • It is used for coating of wire, cables and other electrical goods because PVC is a good insulator of electricity.
  • It is used for making plastic pipes, gramophone records, hand bags, raincoats, inflatable toys, etc.
  • For making vinyl flooring, shower, curtains, false ceiling, wall covering, doors and windows.
  • For making shoes heals and foot wear.
  • For making sheets of tank-linkings, raincoats, lacquers, rods, tubes, packings, table cloths, light fittings, safety helmets, refrigeration components, trays, cycles, motorcycle mudguards, flexible articles such as toys, insulators, leather clothes, dolls, dipped goods such as protective gloves.
  •  It is used in manufacture of types cords, fabrics and ropes.

MP Board Solutions

Polymers Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are natural polymer ? Explain some polymers with example.
Answer:
Natural polymers:
Those polymers which are found in nature (generally in plants and animals) are called natural polymers. The followings are their example:

(a) Polysaccharides:
Starch and cellulose are important example of polysaccharides. They are the polymers of glucose. Cellulose is the main structural material of plants. Plants store their food in the form of starch.

(b) Proteins:
Proteins are polymers of a-amino acids. They are the main constituents of animal cells. Natural silk, wool and leather are some examples.

(c) Nucleic acids:
The polymers of nucleic acids are called nucleotides. Their impor-tant examples are RNA and DNA.

(d) Natural rubber:
Natural rubber is prepared from latex which is obtained from rubber tree. It is a polymer of 2-methyl-1, 3-butadiene (isoprene). It may be noted that polymers like polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, etc. which control various life processes in plants and animals are also called biopolymers.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
On the basis of structure polymers are of how many types ? Explain.
Answer:
Classification based on structure:
This classification is based upon how the monomeric units are linked together. The polymers of this class are of three types:

(i) Linear polymers:
In this type of polymers, the monomer units are linked together to form long linear chains. These linear chains are placed one above the other and are closely packed in space. If A is the monomeric unit then linear chain is formed as given in Fig.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 27

Characteristics:
Due to close packed structure, they have high densities, high tensile strength and high melting point, e.g., polythene, nylon, polystyrene, etc.

(ii) Branched chain polymers:
In this type of polymers, the monomer units combine to form a long chain which is called the main chain. Many side chains are connected to the main chain. The side chains of different lengths constitute branches, e.g., A is the monomeric unit which forms a straight linear chain (main chain). Side chain of A is connected to main chain as shown in Fig. They are not closely packed.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 28
Characteristics:
Due to irregular packed structure, branched chain polymers have low densities, low tensile strength and low melting point, e.g., low density polythene, amylopectin, glycogen, etc.

(iii) Cross-linked polymers:
In these polymers, the monomer units combine to form a three-dimensional network.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Polymers - 29

Characteristics:
They are hard, rigid and brittle due to cross-linked structure, e.g., bakelite, melamine, etc.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life

Chemistry in Everyday Life NCERT Intext Exercises

Question 1.
Sleeping pills are recommended by doctors to the patients suffering from sleeplessness but it is not advisable to take their doses without consultation with the doctor. Why?
Answer:
Most of the drugs taken in doses higher than recommended, may cause harmful effect and act as a poison. Also, side effects arise when a drug binds to more than one receptor site. Thus, it is not advisable to take sleeping pills without consultation with the doctor.

Question 2.
With reference to which classification has the statement, “ranitidine is an antacid” been given?
Answer:
This statement refers to the classification of drugs according to pharmacological effects of the drugs because any drug which is used to neutralise the excess acid present in the stomach will be called an antacid and ranitidine prevents the interaction of histamine with the receptors present in the stomach wall. Histamine stimulates the secretion of pepsin and HCl in the stomach.

Question 3.
Why do we require artificial sweetening agents?
Answer:
Artificial sweetening agents:

  • Control the calorie intake
  • Act as a substitute for sugar for diabetics.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Write the chemical equation for preparing sodium soap from glyceryl oleate and glyceryl palmitate. Structural formulae of these compounds are given below:
(i) (C15H31COO)3C3H5 – Glyceryl palmitate
(ii) (C17H32COO)3C3H5 – Glyceryl oleate
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 1

Question 5.
The following type of non-ionic detergents is present in liquid detergents, emulsifying agents, and wetting agents. Label the hydrophilic and hydrophobic parts in the molecule. Identify the functional group(s) present in the molecule.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 2
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 3

Chemistry in Everyday Life NCERT Text Book Exercises

Question 1.
Why do we need to classify drugs in different ways?
Answer:
The classification of drugs and the reason for classification are as follows:
1. On the basis of pharmacological effect: This classification provides doctor the whole range of drugs available for the treatment of a particular type of problem Hence, such a classification is very useful to doctors.

2. On the basis of drug action: This classification is based on the action of a drug on a particular biochemical process Thus, this classification is important.

3. On the basis of chemical structure: This classification provides the range of drugs sharing common structural features and often having similar pharmacological activity.

4. On the basis of molecular targets: This classification provides medicinal chemists the drugs having the same mechanism of action on targets Hence, is the most useful to medicinal chemists.

Question 2.
Explain the term, target molecules or drug targets as used in medicinal chemistry.
Answer:
Drugs are taken by a patient interact with macromolecules such as proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and nucleic acids, and these are called drug targets. These macromolecules or drug targets are known to perform several roles in the body. The drugs are designed to interact with specific targets so that these have the least chances of effecting the other targets. This minimizes the side effects and localises the action of the drug.

Question 3.
Name the macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets.
Answer:
The macromolecules chosen as drug targets are carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids.

Question 4.
Why should not medicines be taken without consulting doctors?
Answer:
The drugs or medicines have side effects also. These side effects arise because the drug may bind to more than one type of receptor. Further, their wrong choice and overdose can cause havoc and even may cause death. Therefore, it is a must that the medicines should not be given without consulting doctors.

Question 5.
Define the term chemotherapy.
Answer:
The use of chemicals for therapeutic effect is called chemotherapy For example the use of chemicals in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of diseases.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Which forces are involved in holding the drugs to the active site of enzymes ?
Answer:
The forces holding drugs to the active sites of enzymes are hydrogen bonding, ionic bonding, dipole-dipole interactions, or van der Waals forces.

Question 7.
While antacids and anti-allergic drugs interfere with the function of histamines, why do these not interfere with the function of each other?
Answer:
Specific drugs affect particular receptors Antacids and anti-allergic drugs work at different receptors This is the reason why antacids and anti-allergic drugs do not interfere with each other’s functions but interfere with the functions of histamines.

Question 8.
Low level of noradrenaline is the cause of depression. What type of drugs I are needed to cure this problem? Name two drugs.
Answer:
Nor-adrenaline induces a feeling of well-being and helps in changing the mood. If the level of noradrenaline is low, then the signal-sending activity of the hormone becomes low and the person suffers from depression. In such cases, the patient needs anti-depressant drugs which inhibit the enzymes which catalyses the degradation of nor adrenaline. The common drugs used as an anti-depressant are iproniazid and phenelzine.

Question 9.
What is meant by the term ‘broad-spectrum antibiotics’? Explain.
Answer:
Antibiotics that are effective against a wide range of gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria are known as broad-spectrum antibiotics, chloramphenicol is a broad-spectrum antibiotic.

Question 10.
How do antiseptics differ from disinfectants? Give one example of each
Answer:
1. Antiseptics are applied to living tissues such as wounds, cuts etc. to kill or prevent the growth of microorganisms.
Example:
0-2% phenol, tincture iodine, dettol etc.

2. Disinfectants are applied to inanimate (or nonliving) objects such as floors, instruction Disinfectants are applied to inanimate (or nonliving) objects such as floors, instruments, drainage system etc.
Example:
1% solution of phenol, chlorine (0-2 to 0-4 ppm) SO2 in low concentration.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Why are cimetidine and ranitidine better antacids than sodium hydrogen-carbonate or magnesium or aluminium hydroxide?
Answer:
Antacids such as sodium hydrogen carbonate, magnesium hydroxide, and aluminium hydroxide work by neutralising the excess hydrochloric acid present in the stomach However, the root cause for the release of excess acid remains untreated.

Cimetidine and ranitidine are better antacids as they control the root cause of acidity These drugs prevent the interaction of histamine with the receptors present in the stomach walls Consequently there is a decrease in the amount of acid release by the stomach This is why cimetidine and ranitidine are better antacids than sodium hydrogen carbonate, magnesium hydroxide, and aluminium hydroxide.

Question 12.
Name a substance which can be used as an antiseptic as well as a disinfectant.
Answer:
Phenol is a substance which can be used as an antiseptic (0 – 2% solution) as well as a disinfectant (1% solution).

Question 13.
What are the main constituents of Dettol?
Answer:
The main constituents of dettol are chloroxylenol and α -terpineol.

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
What is the tincture of iodine? What is its use?
Answer:
In Chemistry, a tincture is a solution that has alcohol as its solvent. Tincture iodine is a 2 – 3% solution of iodine in an alcohol-water mixture. It is applied on wounds to either kill or prevent the growth of microorganisms.

Question 15.
What are food preservatives ?
Answer:
Food preservatives are chemicals that prevent food from spoilage due to microbial growth Table salt, sugar, vegetable oil, sodium benzoate (C6H3 COONa), and salts of propanoic acid are some examples of food preservatives.

Question 16.
Why is use of aspartame limited to cold foods and soft drinks?
Answer:
Use of aspartame is limited to cold foods and soft drinks because it is unstable at cooking temperature.

Question 17.
What are artificial sweetening agents? Give two examples.
Answer:
Artificial sweetening agents that sweeten food, However, unlike natural sweeteners, they do not add calories to our body They do not harm the human body Some artificial sweeteners are aspartame, saccharin, sucralose, and alitame.

Question 18.
Name the sweetening agent used in the preparation of sweets for a diabetic patient.
Answer:
Any artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin, aspartame or alitame may be added.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
What problem arises in using alitame as an artificial sweetener?
Answer:
Alitame is a high potency sweetener It is difficult to control the sweetness of food while using alitame as an artificial sweetener.

Question 20.
How are synthetic detergents better than soaps?
Answer:

  • Soaps cannot be used in hard water but detergents can be used.
  • Soaps cannot be used in acidic water but detergents can be used.

Question 21.
Explain the following terms with suitable examples
(a) Cationic detergents
(b) Anionic detergents and
(c) Non-ionic detergents.
Answer:
(a) Cationic detergents are those which have a cationic hydrophilic group. These are mostly acetates, chlorides or bromides of quaternary ammonium salts. For example cetyltrimethylammonium chloride.
[CH3(CH2)15 N(CH3)3]+Çl

(b) Anionic detergents are those which have an anionic hydrophilic group. These are of two types:
(i) Sodium alkyl sulphate e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate CH3(CH2)10CH2OSO3Na+
(ii) Sodium alkyl benzene sulphonate e.g., sodium 4-(l-dodecyl) benzene sulpho- nate (SDS)

(c) Non-ionic or neutral detergents are esters of high molecular mass alcohols as in fatty acids. For example, polyethylene glycol stearate.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 4

(c) Non-ionic or neutral detergents are esters of high molecular mass alcohols as in fatty acids. For example, polyethylene glycol stearate.
CH3(CH2)16COO(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OH
Polyethylene glycol stearate.

Question 22.
What are bio-degradable and non-biodegradable detergents? Give one example of each.
Answer:
Detergents that can be degraded by bacteria are called biodegradable detergents Such detergents have straight hydrocarbon chains For example Sodium Lauryl sulphate.

Detergents that cannot be degraded have highly branched hydrocarbon chains For example Sodium – 4- (1, 3, 5,7 – tetramethyl octyl) benzene sulphonate.

Soap molecules form micelles around an oil droplet (dirt) in such a way that the hydrophobic parts of the stearate ions attach themselves to the oil droplet and the hydrophilic parts project outside the oil droplet Due to the polar nature of the hydrophilic parts, the stearate ions (along with the dirt) are pulled into the water, thereby removing the dirt from the cloth.

MP Board Solutions

Question 23.
Why do soaps not work in hard water?
Answer:
Hard water contains calcium and magnesium salts. Therefore, in hard water, soaps get precipitated as insoluble calcium and magnesium soaps which being insoluble stick to the cloth as gummy mass and block the ability of soap to move oil or grease from the cloth.

Question 24.
Can you use soaps and synthetic detergents to check the hardness of water?
Answer:
Soaps get precipitated in hard water, but not in soft water, Therefore, soaps can be used for checking the hardness of water However, synthetic detergents do not get precipitated either cationic part of these detergents contains a long hydrocarbon chain and a positive charge on the N atom.

Question 25.
Explain the cleansing action of soaps.
Answer:
Cleaning action of soaps:
Cleaning action of soap and detergents are based on miceller activity. Soaps are sodium salt of higher fatty acids e.g., sodium stearate which ionises as:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 21
The anionic head of stearate ion (- COO) is hydrophilic and hence has great affinity for water. The hydrocarbon part is hydrophobic and has great affinity for oil, grease etc.

When soap dissolves in water the anions (C17H35COO) form micelle encapsulating oil or grease inside. These micelles are removed by rinsing with water. Thus the main function of soap is to convert oily and greasy dirt to colloidal particles by forming an emulsion. Soaps, therefore, act as emulsifying agents. This mechanism of cleaning is also applicable to synthetic detergents like sodium lauryl sulphate CH3(CH2)11 SO4 Na+. Repulsion of similar charge -COO or -SO4 covering each oil (grease) micelle prevents them to come together. Thus oil or grease remains in the suspension.

Question 26.
If the water contains dissolved calcium hydrogen carbonate, out of soaps and synthetic detergents which one will you use for cleaning clothes?
Answer:
Calcium bicarbonate makes water hard. Soap will give a precipitate with this hard water and therefore, cannot be used for cleaning clothes. On the other hand, synthetic detergents does not give precipitate in hard water because its calcium salt is also soluble in water. Therefore, synthetic detergents can be used for cleaning clothes in hard water.

MP Board Solutions

Question 27.
Label the hydrophilic and hydrophobic parts in the following compounds:
(a) CH3(CH2)10CH2OSO3Na+
(b) CH3(CH2)15\(\overset { + }{ N } \)(CH3)3\(\overset { – }{ Br } \)
(c) CH3(CH2)16COO(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OH
Answer:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 5

MP Board Solutions

Chemistry in Everyday Life Other Important Exercises

Chemistry in Everyday Life Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which isomer of cyclohexane hexachloride is a strong insecticide:
(a) α
(b) β
(c) γ
(d) δ
Answer:
(c) γ

Question 2.
Denatured spirit is specially used:
(a) In medicine
(b) In fuel
(c) In varnish
(d) In propellant.
Answer:
(a) In medicine

Question 3.
Which of the following is not an example of analgesic:
(a) Phenacetin
(b) Paracetamol
(c) Chloramphenicol
(d) Morphine.
Answer:
(c) Chloramphenicol

Question 4.
Which of the following medicine was discovered by Alexander Fleming:
(a) Penicillin
(b) Streptomycin
(c) Chloromycetin
(d) Aspirin.
Answer:
(a) Penicillin

Quention 5.
Which medicine is used for the treatment of tuberculosis:
(a) Penicillin
(b) Streptomycin
(c) Chloromycetin
(d) Sulphadiazine.
Answer:
(b) Streptomycin

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Which medicine is used for the treatement of T.B.:
(a) Pencillin
(b) Aspirin
(c) Chloramphenicol
(d) Streptomycin.
Answer:
(d) Streptomycin.

Question 7.
Saccharin is times sweeter than sugarcane:
(a) 10
(b) 600
(c) 4000
(d) 40.
Answer:
(b) 600

Question 8.
The chemical substance extracted from Rauvolfia serpentina is:
(a) Aspirin
(b) Quinone
(c) Bithionol
(d) Reserpine.
Answer:
(d) Reserpine.

Question 9.
Compound which is used both as an antipyretic as well as analgesic is:
(a) Phenacetin
(b) Sulpha drug
(c) Paracetamol
(d) Aspirin.
Answer:
(d) Aspirin.

Question 10.
Which of the following group expresses maximum number of detergent:
(a) Cationic
(b) Anionic
(c) Non-ionic
(d) Hydrophobic.
Answer:
(b) Anionic

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Which of the following is a tranquillizer:
(a) Seconol
(b) Streptomycin
(c) Morphine
(d) Phenacetin.
Answer:
(a) Seconol

Question 12.
Which of the following is not an antibiotic:
(a) Terramycin
(b) Chloromycetin
(c) Morphine Salol is
(d) D-Penicillin.
Answer:
(c) Morphine Salol is

Question 13.
Salol is used as:
(a) Antipyretic
(b) Antipyretic
(c) (a) And (b) both
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) (a) And (b) both

Question 14.
Chloroquine is an example of:
(a) Antipyretic
(b) Antimalarial
(c) Antibacterial
(d) Antituberculor.
Answer:
(b) Antimalarial

Question 15.
Which of the following is a broad spectrum antibiotic:
(a) Streptomycin
(b) Penicillin
(c) Ampicillin
(d) Chioramphenicol.
Answer:
(d) Chioramphenicol.

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
Which of the following is not an antibiotic:
(a) Terramycin
(b) Chioromycetin
(c) Morphine
(d) Penicillamine.
Answer:
(c) Morphine

Quesrtion 17.
Veronal is used as:
(a) Anaesthetic
(b) Sedative
(c) Antiseptic
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Sedative

Question 18.
Which of the following ¡s a hypnotic:
(a) Lurninol
(b) Salol
(c) Catechol
(d) Phenol.
Answer:
(a) Lurninol

Question 19.
Pheromones are secreted by:
(a) Endocrine glands
(b) Stomach
(c) Exocrine glands
(d) Sex glands.
Answer:
(c) Exocrine glands

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Oil of …………. is used as medicine.
  2. Sodium benzoate and potassium metabisulphate are good ………….
  3. Sodium dodecyl benzene sulphonate and sodium lauryl sarcosinate are important ………….
  4. Iodine is a strong ………….
  5. Example of a tranquilizer medicine is ………….
  6. …………. is obtained from cinchona bark.
  7. Chloroquine is a …………. medicine.
  8. …………. is known as father of surgery.
  9. Alexander Fleming discovered …………. antibiotic medicine.
  10. Substance which reduces the acidity of stomach is called ………….

Answer:

  1. Cinnamon
  2. Preservative
  3. Detergent
  4. Antiseptic
  5. Seconal
  6. Quinine
  7. Antimalarial
  8. Sushrut
  9. Penicillin
  10. Antacid.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Match the following:
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 6
Answer:

  1. (e) Antipyretic.
  2. (c) Tranquillizer
  3. (b) Antibiotic
  4. (a) Anaesthetic
  5. (d) Antiseptic

Question 4.
Answer in one word / sentence:

  1. What are pain reliever medicine called ?
  2. Write name of two analgesic.
  3. Name a suitable chemical for excessive tension and mental disorders.
  4. Streptomycin medicine is used for the treatment of which disease ?
  5. Why are antifertility drugs used ?

Answer:

  1. Analgesic
  2. Aspirin and Morphine
  3. Equanil
  4. Malaria
  5. For birth control or control of reproductive ability

MP Board Solutions

Chemistry in Everyday Life Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are germicides ?
Answer:
Germicides are substances which possess the power to destroy germs. Sulphur compounds, mercury com-pounds (mercuric iodide) and phenolic compounds are usedas germicides. Sulphur compounds in soap protect the skin from pimples, dandruff and skin infection. Phenolic compounds are mostly used as germicides. Cresyclic acid which is a mix-ture of m-cresol and p-cresol is mixed in soap as a germicide.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 7

Question 2.
Write the structure of chloramphenicol and state its use.
Answer:
Chloramphenicol is an effective antibiotic. It is mainly used in typhoid, fever, diarrhoea, cough, meningitis and urinary diseases.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 8

Question 3.
What do you understand by antipyretics ?
Answer:
These are used to lower down the body temperature in high fever. These drugs are used both as antipyretic and as analgesic, e.g., aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid), parace-tamol (4-acetamido phenol), phenacetin (4-ethoxy acetanilide), analgin, etc.

Question 4.
What are Antibiotics ? Write name of any two antibiotics.
Answer:
Antibiotics:
are chemical substances which are. produced by micro-organisms like; bacteria, fungi, actinomycetes and destroy some other micro-organisms are like, virus, ricketsia or obstruct their growth. Example : Penicillin, Streptomycin etc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What is Immune system ? How does it develop ?
Answer:
For the destruction of bacteria or antigen in our body, lymphocytes are devel-oped which are known as Immune. These are a specific type of white blood cells. These prepare and release a special type of protein called globulin to destroy the poison. These proteins destroy the attacking virus, bacteria and poisonous substances. Lymphocyte bind the antigen and themselves divide fast by which immunization increase and effect of anti-gen is destroyed.

Question 6.
What are antiseptics ?
Answer:
Antiseptics:
An antiseptic kills the bacteria or prevents the multiplication of bacteria. These also prevent pus formation. Antiseptics do not harm living tissues. Tincture iodine, phenol (0-2%), dettol, chloroxylenol, etc. are applied on skin and bactrim, septran, etc. are taken orally as pills. Bad odour coming out of the wounds due to bacterial decomposition on the body or in the mouth are also reduced by the use of antiseptics.

For such purposes, antiseptics are usually incorporated in face-powder, breath purifiers, deodorants, etc. to reduce the inten-sity of bad odour. Neem soaps containing the extract of neem seeds are also used as antiseptic soaps. Dettol is a mixture of chloroxylenol and terpineol in a suitable solvent is commonly used antiseptic. Bithionol antiseptic is added to soap to provide antiseptic properties to it. Tincture iodine is 2-3% solution of iodine in alcohol and water.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 9

Question 7.
What do you mean by Antibiotics ? Name the first antibiotic.
Answer:
Chemical substances which are produced by mirco-organism and are used to destroy other micro-organism, are called antibiotics. These chemicals checks the life cycle of bacteria and stop reproduction resulting in release from disease. Antibiotics are almost specific for kinds of illness.

The first antibiotic penicillin was discovered by Alexander Fleming in 1928. He was awarded Nobel prize in 1945 for this important discovery. General formula of penicillin is C9H11N2O4S – R. It is a narrow spectrum drug and used in bronchitis, pneumonia, sore throat and abcesses. Before administration, tolerance has to be tested.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 10
By changing the group R, different penicillin are prepared.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Write name and formula of some Antipyretic medicines.
Answer:
Antipyretic:
Chemicals used to reduce the body temperature during fever are called antipyretics. These effect the central nervous system of the body. Like paracetamol. Some chemicals function both as antipyretic as well as analgesic like: Aspirin, Paracetamol, Analgin etc. use of these produce sweat and cool the body. Chemical formula of common
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 11

Question 9.
Give definition of antihistamine drug with name and uses.
Answer:
These are amines which controls the allergy effect produced by histamines. Histamine is found in all body tissue and is also released in allergic conditions due to which allergic responses such as tissue inflammation, asthma, itching etc. are introduced in the body. Drugs which prevent the production of histamine and fight against the allergy effects are called antihistamines.
Example:
(i) Entergon:
It is used in strong allergic conditions.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 12

(ii) Benadryl

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 13

Question 10.
What are the main differences between soap and detergents ? Ans. Differences between Soap and Detergents :
Soap:

  • Soaps are sodium salts of higher fatty acids.
  • These cannot be used with hard water.
  • Their aqueous solution is alkaline in nature.
  • These contain oil and are not good cleansing agent.
  • These cannot be used for soft and delicate cloth.

Detergents:

  • Detergents are sodium salt of alkyl benzene sulphonate.
  • These can be used with hard water.
  • Their aqueous solution is neutral in nature.
  • These do not contain oil and are better cleansing agent.
  • These can be used for soft and delicate cloth.

Question 11.
Explain each with an example.
(A) Antibiotics
(B) Analgesic (Pain Killer).
Answer:
(A) Antibiotics:
Chemical substance which are produced by micro-organism and used to destroy micro-organism are called antibiotics. These are of two types:

  • Broad spectrum Antibiotic:
    Example: Tetracycline, chloramphenicol, Penicil-lin.
  • Narrow Spectrum Antibiotic :
    Example : Niastatin, Penicillin antibiotic medi-cines are used for the treatment of typhoid, whooping cough, Pneumonia.

(B) Analgesic:
Drugs which give relief from pain or reduced pain are called analge-sics. Types and Examples:

  • Narcotics: Morphine, Codeine.
  • Non-Narcotics: Aspirin, Analgin, Paracetamol.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
What is preservative ? Give the name and formula of any two preserva-tives.
Answer:
A preservative is defined as “A substance added to food, capable of retarding the growth of micro-organism which deteriorate the food within no time’’. The preservative may be natural compounds such as sugars, salt, acids, etc. as well as they may be synthetic i.e. Sodium benzoate.
Example:

  • Vinegar or acetic acid : CH3 COOH
  • Sodium benzoate: C6H5COONa.

Chemistry in Everyday Life Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write short notes on:

  1. Antifertility drugs
  2. Detergents
  3. Antacids
  4. Sedatives
  5. Sulpha drugs.

Answer:
1. Antifertility drugs:
Drugs which are used to check pregnancy in women are called antifertility drugs. Actually, these drugs control the female menstrual cycle and ovulation. The antifertility agent in these drugs are steroids and these drugs are used in the form of oral pills. A mixture of synthetic estrogen and progesterone derivative are used as birth control pill. These are more effective than the natural hormone. Ethynylestradiol and norethindrone are the content of common contraceptive pills.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 14

2. Detergents:
Unsaturated hydrocarbon of ethylene type containing 10 to 18 carbon atoms on treatment with sulphuric acid forms organic acid. Sodium salt of organic acid have moisture absorbing and purification property. This compound is called synthetic detergent. Example: Sodium w-dodecyl benzene sulphonate, Sodium n – dodecyl sulphate.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 15

CH3 – (CH2)10 – CH2 – SO4Na+
Sodium n-dodecyl sulphate

Synthetic detergents have two parts:

  • A long chain of hydrocarbon which is hydrophobic (Water repellent).
  • Small ionic chain is hydrophilic (Water attracting).

Ionic chain is generally of sulphonate (SO3Na) or sodium sulphate (SO4Na). Detergents are surface active compounds which decreases surface tension of water. When these compounds are dissolved in water they scatter dirt particles leaving the surface clean.

Properties of detergents:
Detergents are superior to soap.
1. Detergents can be used in hard as well as soft water because they do not form insoluble salt with calcium and magnesium ions of hard water while soap cannot be used in hard water.

2. Aqueous solution of detergent is neutral. Therefore, detergents can clean soft fibres without damaging them. Soap solution is alkaline due to hydrolysis and is harmful for washing soft fibres.

Uses of detergents:
Detergensts act as cleansing agent. Like soap it can be used for cleaning cotton, woollen, silky and synthetic fibre cloth and for cleaning other domestic items.

MP Board Solutions

3. Antacids:
Substance which remove the excess acid in the stomach and raise the pH to appropriate level are called antacid Calcium carbonate, Sodium bicarbonate, Magnesium hydroxide or Aluminium hydroxide is used in the form of aqueous suspension or tablets to treats hyperacidity. These substances react with excess hydrochloride acid and neutralizes it partially. Nowadays Omeparazole and Lansoparazole are prescribed as antacids.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 16

4. Sedatives:
These are given to those patients who are violent and mentally agitated.
Example:

  • Equanil
  • Barbituric acid.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 17

5. Sulpha drugs:
Like antibiotics, sulpha drugs are used to kill micro-organism. These are prepared in laboratory. Sulphadiazine, sulphanilamide, sulphathiazole, sulpha guanidine, etc. are important sulpha drugs.

Question 2.
Write notes on the following:

  • Tranquillizers and Hypnotics
  • Antidepressant.

Answer:
(i) Tranquillizers:
Tranquillizers are the chemical substances which affect higher centers of central nervous systems and reduce anxiety and tension. Tranquillizers are also called psycho-therapeutic drugs. These drugs make the patient passive temporarily so that emotional distress or depression is reduced. The patient restores confidence. These drugs if taken for long-time make the person habitual. Luminal, Barbituric acid, seconal, equanil, etc. are the drugs of this class. These are components of sleeping pills.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 18

(ii) Anti-depression:
These are given to patient for boosting their morals in the stage of acute depressions. Some mood elevator drugs are vitellin, methadone, cocaine, etc. These act on the central nervous system. Person becomes healthy by its use and develop confidence. These should be taken by the advice of doctor. Tophrenil is one such medicine. The amphetemin group of medicine help to upraise the mental level. Its com-mon example is benzedine.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 19

Question 3.
Give one example of Acidic dye and Basic dye.
Answer:
Acidic dye: In these, acidic group like phenolic, sulphonic (SO3H) are in the form of sodium salts. These colour animal fibre like wool, silk etc. Example: orange I and II.
MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 16 Chemistry in Everyday Life - 20

  • Acidic dye: Methyl orange , Methyl red.
  • Basic dye: Malachite green, Aniline yellow.

Question 4.
Write example of the following chemicals:

  1. Two Analgesics
  2. Two Antiseptic
  3. Two Antiseptic chemical
  4. Two Anti-biotic
  5. Two Anaesthetic
  6. Two Sulpha drug
  7. Two Rocket propellant
  8. Two use of chloramphenicol antibiotic.

Answer:

  1. Two Analgesic: (i) Morphine, (ii) Aspirin.
  2. Two Antiseptic: (i) Dettol, (ii) Bithional.
  3. Two antiseptic chemical: (i) Boric acid, (ii) Gention violet.
  4. Two Antibiotic: (i) Terramycin, (ii) Streptomycin.
  5. Two Anaesthetic: (i) Cyclopropane, (ii) Pelledyne.
  6. Two sulpha drug: (i) Sulphonide, (ii) Sulphadyne.
  7. Two rocket propellant: (i) Polyurethane, (ii) Ammonium perchlorate.
  8. Two use of chloramphenicol antibiotic: (i) In Typhiod, (ii) High fever and diarrhoea.

MP Board Class 12th Chemistry Solutions

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 13 Entrepreneurship Development

MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 13 Entrepreneurship Development

Entrepreneurship Development Important Questions

Entrepreneurship Development Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answers :

Question 1.
Entrepreneur takes :
(a) Risk n
(b) High risk
(c) Low risk
(d)Normal and fixed risk.
Answer:
(d)Normal and fixed risk.

Question 2.
Out of it which is not a work of entrepreneur :
(a) Taking risk
(b) Provision of capital
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Day today business (undertaking)
Answer:
(d) Day today business (undertaking)

Question 3.
Out of it which does not discriminate entrepreneur and management:
(a) Entrepreneur search business but managers run them
(b) Entrepreneur are the owner of their own business and manager employee.
(c) Entrepreneur earns profit but managers get salary
(d) Entrepreneur is one time work while management is a continuous process.
Answer:
(d) Entrepreneur is one time work while management is a continuous process.

Question 4.
Chamber of commerce provides services at:
(a) Urban level
(b) State and national level
(c) International level
(d) All the above levels.
Answer:

Question 5.
Out of it which business is not related to successful entrepreneurship :
(a) Research and development
(b) Daily business of life
(c) Continuous newness
(d) Production according to the customers need.
Answer:
(b) Daily business of life

Question 6.
In India entrepreneur development programmer:
(a) Necessary
(b) Not necessary
(c) Waste of money
(d) Waste of time.
Answer:
(a) Necessary

Question 7.
Entrepreneur development programmer provides:
(a) Unemployment
(b) Employment
(c) Cheating
(d) Corruption.
Answer:
(b) Employment

Question 8.
Entrepreneurship:
(a) Takes birth (b) Is made
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) All the above.
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 9.
Indian entrepreneur developmental organization is situated in :
(a) Ahmadabad
(b) Mumbai
(c) Delhi
(d) Chennai.
Answer:
(a) Ahmadabad

Question 10.
Future of entrepreneur in India is :
(a) Dark
(b) Bright
(c) Difficulty
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Bright

Question 11.
Indian investment centre was established in :
(a) Indian government.
(b) By Madhya Pradesh government.
(c) Maharashtra government
(d) By Gujrat government.
Answer:
(b) By Madhya Pradesh government.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks :

  1. Establishment of entrepreneur development organization was done by __________government.
  2. Social and economic development of a nation is the result of __________
  3. __________ provides financial help to entrepreneurs.
  4. Entrepreneur is a process depended on __________

Answer:

  1. Gujrat
  2. Entrepreneur
  3. ICICI
  4. Knowledge.

Question 3.
Write true or false :

  1. In India the speed of entrepreneur development is fast.
  2. Entrepreneur development organization is situated in Ahmadabad.
  3. In India there is need of entrepreneur development programme.
  4. Money and time spend on entrepreneur development is a waste of money and time.
  5. Entrepreneur Is bomb and are made.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. False
  5. True.

Question 4.
Write answer in one word/sentence :

  1. Write the name of any one poverty eradication programme.
  2. What do you mean by entrepreneur ?
  3. “Entrepreneur is a creative process”. Explain.
  4. “Entrepreneur is creating confusion theoritically”.
  5. In promotion which functions come ?
  6. Entrepreneur is not a Science nor art but knowledge is its base. Who said it.

Answer:

  1. Jawahar Rozgar Yojana
  2. Entrepreneur is one efficiency
  3. Pro. Shumpitar
  4. William Bemol
  5. New technique
  6. Peter. F. Drucke’r.

Question 5.
Match the columns :
MP Board Class 12th Business Studies Important Questions Chapter 13 Entrepreneurship Development image - 1
Entrepreneurship Development Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why is entrepreneur called the axis of economic progress ?
Answer:
Entrepreneur is called the axis of economic progress because economic development of a nation takes place due to important activities of entrepreneurs only.

Question 2.
Write the characteristics of entrepreneurship.
Answer:
Following are the characteristics :

  1. Knowledge base : Entrepreneurship is a knowledge based process. Without knowledge entrepreneur cannot be earned and without experience entrepreneur cannot do any process.
  2. Creative process : Nature of entrepreneur is creative. In organization always creative work is done. By creative thinking always efferts are made to increase quality.

Question 3.
Write the main objectives of entrepreneurial development.
Answer:
The main objectives of entrepreneurial development are as follows :

  1. To identify and train potential entrepreneurs.
  2. Helps in imparting basic managerial understanding.
  3. To industrialize rural and backward areas.
  4. To generate self employment for the educated unemployment youth.
  5. To improve managerial skills of entrepreneur.
  6. To develop necessary knowledge and skills amongst the participants.
  7. To develop an atmosphere of regional balanced development.

Question 4.
What do you mean by SIDO ?
Answer:
Small Industries Development Organization (SIDO): This was established by the central government in 1954. This organization is rendering its valuable services throughout the country with 27 Small Industries Services Institutes, 31 Branch Institutes, 3 8 Expansion Centres, 4 Regional Observation Centres, 20 Local Observation Centres etc. It is called SIDO in short. SIDO has also established Womens’ Cell for development of women entrepreneurs.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
“Entrepreneurship is an internal motivation.” Explain.
Answer:
Entrepreneurship encourages a person to discover, new business opportunities and to implement innovative ideas in practical business life. Entrepreneurship is an internal component not an external component. It helps to bring changes in mentality of persons as it is based on education. A person becomes an entrepreneur by gaining education and experience.

Question 6.
What are the functions of All India Small Industries Board ?
Answer:
All India Small Industries Board : This Board was established in 1954 as an Advisory Committee of the central government. This Board takes decisions regarding policies and programmes for establishment and development of small industries. A central minister is ex-officio chairman of the Board with representatives from central and state governments.

Question 7.
What do you mean by entrepreneur values ?
Answer:
Those values by which determines the personality of entrepreneurs are called values of entrepreneur. On the basis of values of persons one can judge their behaviour and on the basis of individuals judgement of organization can be done. Development of values of personality is that he should respect others and should be honest to others. Due to it personality is developed. Values play important role in family only. Faith is developed among the members of family and various families form sound.

Question 8.
“Entrepreneurship is a professional activity”. Explain.
Answer:
In any business enterprise, it is essential to discover new market, take spontaneous decisions have different leadership and to bring changes in nature of work. Thus like other professions (Law, Medical, Engineering etc.) entrepreneurship. The nature of entrepreneurship is also a profession can be developed like managerial efficiency with the help of education and training.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
“Entrepreneurship arises due to environment.” Explain.
Answer:
The success of entrepreneurial development depends much on environmental factors. Entrepreneur makes plans from political, social, economical and legal environment and takes risk to bring some innovations. This entrepreneurship arises due to environment.

Question 10
What do you mean by entrepreneur motivation ?
Answer:
Those continuous activities which motivates the employees to work at all levels of organization is called entrepreneur motivation.

MP Board Class 12 Business Studies Important Questions